1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 The following 2 lines are empty:
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8368 environment is identical to
8372 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8373 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8380 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8384 \begin_layout Section
8385 Nesting Environments
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Nesting ! Environments
8396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8405 \begin_layout Subsection
8409 \begin_layout Standard
8411 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8413 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8415 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8417 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8453 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8457 \begin_inset space ~
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8469 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8478 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8480 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8483 arg "depth-increment"
8489 arg "depth-decrement"
8503 arg "depth-increment"
8509 arg "depth-decrement"
8513 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8514 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8518 \begin_layout Standard
8519 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8520 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8521 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8522 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8523 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8527 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8529 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8531 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8534 \begin_layout Subsection
8535 What You Can and Can't Nest
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8540 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8545 than a simple yes or no.
8546 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8550 Completely unnestable
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8565 environments have them:
8568 \begin_layout Description
8569 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8570 Can't nest into them.
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Description
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8610 Nestable You can nest them.
8611 You can nest other things into them.
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Description
8678 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8679 You can't nest anything into them.
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_inset space ~
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8797 \begin_inset space ~
8800 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8801 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8802 nested section headings violate this.
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8811 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8812 \begin_inset Index idx
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8825 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8826 affected by nesting anyhow.
8830 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 Figures and tables in
8856 are not affected by this.
8861 Have a look at section
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8868 reference "sec:Floats"
8872 for more information about
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8881 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8882 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8895 of its own, it behaves just like a
8896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8903 paragraph environment.
8904 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8909 Here's an example with a table:
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 This is (a) and it's nested.
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8929 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Tabular
8932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9038 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9041 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 This is (a) and it's nested.
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9052 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9060 \begin_inset Tabular
9061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9178 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 This is (a) and it's nested.
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9199 \begin_inset Tabular
9200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9201 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9295 \begin_layout Enumerate
9297 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9308 \begin_layout Standard
9309 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9315 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9316 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9320 \begin_layout Subsection
9321 Usage and General Features
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9326 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 is the innermost possible depth.
9336 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9340 level #1 – outermost
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9375 both of them in the example.
9376 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9386 For example, if we tried to nest another
9391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9398 , we would get errors.
9401 \begin_layout Subsection
9403 \begin_inset Index idx
9406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9417 We have several examples of nested environments.
9418 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9423 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9426 \begin_layout Labeling
9427 \labelwidthstring MMM
9428 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9437 \begin_layout Labeling
9438 \labelwidthstring MMM
9439 #2-a This is level #2.
9440 We created it by using
9443 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9449 arg "depth-increment"
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #3-a This is level #3.
9459 This time, we just enter
9466 arg "depth-increment"
9470 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9474 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9480 arg "depth-increment"
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9492 environment, nested inside of
9493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9501 So, it's at level #4.
9502 We did this by entering
9505 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9511 arg "depth-increment"
9514 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9519 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9535 \begin_layout Standard
9540 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9543 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9549 \begin_layout Labeling
9550 \labelwidthstring MMM
9551 #4-a This is level #4.
9555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9563 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9567 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9572 keep nesting things inside
9573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9594 and this is level #6.
9595 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9599 \begin_layout Labeling
9600 \labelwidthstring MMM
9601 #5-b Back to level #5.
9605 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 arg "depth-decrement"
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9629 arg "depth-decrement"
9632 , we're back at level #4.
9636 \begin_layout Labeling
9637 \labelwidthstring MMM
9638 #3-b Back to level #3.
9639 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9643 \begin_layout Labeling
9644 \labelwidthstring MMM
9645 #2-b Back to level #2.
9650 \begin_layout Labeling
9651 \labelwidthstring MMM
9652 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9653 After this sentence, we will enter
9657 and change the paragraph environment back to
9664 \begin_layout Standard
9665 We could have also used the
9681 environment in place of the
9686 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9690 Example 2: Inheritance
9693 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9694 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9710 \begin_inset Newline newline
9713 which, we will change to the
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 environment, at level #2.
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 Notice how the nested
9734 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9738 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 We ended this example by entering
9748 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9752 and reset the nesting depth by using
9755 arg "depth-decrement"
9761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9762 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9771 \begin_inset Argument 1
9774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9775 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 This is level #1, in an
9788 paragraph environment.
9789 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9804 arg "depth-increment"
9808 Now, what happens if we nest an
9812 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9813 label be? An asterisk?
9817 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9828 So, its label is a bullet.
9829 (We got here by using
9832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9838 arg "depth-increment"
9841 , then changing the environment to
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Here's level #4, produced using
9853 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9859 arg "depth-increment"
9863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9871 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9876 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9880 , because we are in the
9888 environment (that is, it is an
9903 \begin_layout Enumerate
9908 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9909 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 arg "depth-decrement"
9930 to decrease the depth after the next
9933 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9950 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9954 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9964 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9969 reset the counter for the label.
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9987 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9988 into the twofold-nested
9996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 The same thing happens if we do another
10000 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10006 arg "depth-decrement"
10009 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10012 \begin_layout Standard
10013 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10018 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10029 The number of other
10033 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10040 The same rule applies for the
10044 environment, as well.
10047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10048 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10053 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10054 the same detail with how we did it.
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10078 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10079 the example in parentheses someplace.
10080 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10081 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10082 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10095 \begin_layout Verse
10096 Now we will add verse.
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 It will get much worse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "depth-increment"
10121 \begin_layout Verse
10122 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10133 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10141 \begin_layout Verse
10142 Here comes a table:
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10155 \begin_inset Tabular
10156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10244 \begin_layout Verse
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10258 arg "depth-increment"
10264 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10270 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 arg "depth-decrement"
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10290 : level #1) This is another item.
10291 Note that selecting a
10295 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10296 3 times to put the table inside the
10304 \begin_layout Quotation
10305 We're now ending the
10309 list and changing to
10314 We're still at level #1.
10315 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10316 The next set of paragraphs is a
10317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10324 We will nest both the
10331 \begin_inset space ~
10336 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10340 for the letter body.
10344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10347 to preserve the depth.
10348 Remember that you need to use
10351 arg "newline-insert newline"
10354 to create multiple lines inside the
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10371 \begin_layout Right Address
10373 \begin_inset Newline newline
10376 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10383 \begin_layout Address
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10396 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10397 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10398 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10399 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10400 as soon as possible.
10401 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10406 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10407 with your order, along with payment.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We thank you again for your patience.
10414 \begin_layout Address
10416 \begin_inset Newline newline
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 That ends that example!
10427 \begin_layout Standard
10428 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10429 gives you a lot of power with just
10431 We could have easily nested an
10452 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10455 \begin_layout Subsection
10457 \begin_inset Index idx
10460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10461 Nesting ! Separation
10467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10469 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10476 \begin_layout Standard
10477 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10479 For example you need two different enumerations:
10482 \begin_layout Enumerate
10487 \begin_layout Enumerate
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator plain
10503 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10530 list item and use the menu
10532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Start New Environment
10536 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10537 ) and behind it the new list.
10540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10541 Start New Parent Environment
10543 only appears if the item is nested.
10544 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10550 (red arrow in LyX).
10551 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10552 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10555 \begin_layout Standard
10556 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10559 arg "paragraph-break"
10566 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10569 \begin_layout Section
10570 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10571 \begin_inset Index idx
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 \begin_layout Standard
10584 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10585 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10587 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10588 be broken at the end of a line.
10589 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10593 \begin_layout Subsection
10595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10597 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10602 \begin_inset Index idx
10605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10616 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10617 ) not to break the line at
10619 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10622 \begin_layout Quote
10623 Further documentation is given in section
10624 \begin_inset Newline newline
10628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10630 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10654 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10663 A protected space is set with
10665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10676 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10682 \begin_layout Subsection
10684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10686 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10691 \begin_inset Index idx
10694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10695 Spacing ! Horizontal
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10707 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 The length units are listed in Appendix
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10718 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10729 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10734 \begin_inset Index idx
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 Spaces ! Inter-word
10746 \begin_layout Standard
10747 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10748 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10749 at the ends of sentences.
10750 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10751 automatically takes care about this.
10752 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10753 followed by a period; see section
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10760 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10765 To insert a normal space, select
10767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 \begin_inset space ~
10778 arg "space-insert normal"
10784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10788 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10793 \begin_inset Index idx
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10823 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10824 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10825 inside abbreviations:
10828 \begin_layout Quote
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10834 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10837 \begin_layout Standard
10838 or between values and units.
10839 Compare for example this:
10840 \begin_inset Newline newline
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10851 10 kg (normal space
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10868 arg "space-insert thin"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_layout Standard
10879 You can also insert the following space types:
10882 \begin_layout Description
10884 \begin_inset space ~
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10891 space A line with a
10892 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10896 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10903 negative thin space between the arrows.
10906 \begin_layout Description
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10915 space A line with a
10916 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10920 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10927 negative medium space between the arrows.
10930 \begin_layout Description
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10939 space A line with a
10940 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10944 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10951 negative thick space between the arrows.
10954 \begin_layout Description
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10964 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10968 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10976 \begin_inset space ~
10980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 em) space between the arrows.
10986 \begin_layout Description
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11000 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 em) space between the arrows.
11018 \begin_layout Description
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11028 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11032 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11040 \begin_inset space ~
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 em) space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Description
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11060 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 cm space between the arrows.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11083 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11087 lists the different space sizes.
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 \begin_inset Float table
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11102 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11106 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 \begin_inset Tabular
11117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11236 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11395 \begin_inset Index idx
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 \begin_layout Standard
11408 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11409 feature for adding extra space
11410 in a uniform fashion.
11411 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11412 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11413 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11414 equally between themselves.
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11421 \begin_layout Quote
11423 This is on the left side
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 This is on the right
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_layout Quote
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11461 That was an example in the
11467 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11475 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11478 is one in a standard paragraph.
11479 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11483 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11495 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_layout Standard
11524 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11528 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11540 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11552 \begin_inset space ~
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11564 \begin_inset space ~
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11579 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11583 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11585 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11586 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11590 option in the space dialog.
11598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11602 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11607 \begin_inset Index idx
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 \begin_layout Standard
11620 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11621 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11628 What is correct English?:
11629 \begin_inset Newline newline
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11640 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset Newline newline
11660 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11696 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11699 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11720 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11730 That is why it is named
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11740 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11748 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11753 \begin_inset Index idx
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11766 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11777 There you find the following sizes:
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11793 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11794 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11799 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset Index idx
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 Document ! Settings
11819 for the paragraph separation.
11820 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11837 \begin_inset Index idx
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11847 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11852 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11853 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11862 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 s are described in section
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11878 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11887 If there are several
11891 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11892 You can therefore use
11896 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11899 \begin_layout Standard
11904 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11911 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11929 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11930 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11942 \begin_layout Subsection
11943 Paragraph Alignment
11944 \begin_inset Index idx
11947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11948 Paragraph ! Alignment
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11962 dialog (toolbar button
11965 arg "layout-paragraph"
11969 There are five possibilities:
11972 \begin_layout Itemize
11980 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11986 \begin_layout Itemize
11994 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12000 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12014 \begin_layout Itemize
12022 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12028 \begin_layout Itemize
12036 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12043 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12044 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12045 the left and right margins.
12046 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 This paragraph is right aligned,
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 this one is centered,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is left aligned.
12064 \begin_layout Subsection
12066 \begin_inset Index idx
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 Page breaks ! Forced
12076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12078 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12088 force a page break where you want one.
12089 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 is good at page breaking.
12091 Only if you use a lot of
12095 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12101 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12105 have to change the page breaking.
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12111 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 \begin_inset space ~
12122 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 \begin_inset space ~
12132 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12134 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12135 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12140 at the top of a page.
12141 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12143 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12144 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12145 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12149 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12153 to learn more about
12160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12164 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12169 \begin_inset Index idx
12172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 Page breaks ! Clear
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12182 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12183 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12184 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12185 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12186 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12189 \begin_layout Standard
12190 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12201 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12215 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12216 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12219 \begin_layout Subsection
12221 \begin_inset Index idx
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12233 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12243 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12260 arg "newline-insert newline"
12264 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12281 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12284 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12286 This is useful to avoid
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12297 \begin_layout Standard
12298 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 very good at line breaking.
12302 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12303 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12310 reference "sec:Quote"
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12317 reference "sec:Verse"
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12331 \begin_layout Subsection
12333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12335 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12340 \begin_inset Index idx
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12377 you can insert horizontal lines.
12378 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12379 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12380 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12396 \begin_layout Section
12397 Characters and Symbols
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12402 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12403 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12411 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12415 for information on how this is done.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12424 dialog via the menu
12426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12427 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12443 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12445 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12453 \begin_layout Section
12454 Fonts and Text Styles
12455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12457 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12464 \begin_layout Subsection
12466 \begin_inset Index idx
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12478 \begin_layout Standard
12479 There are two types of fonts:
12482 \begin_layout Description
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset Index idx
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12502 characters) in the font.
12503 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12504 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12505 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12506 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12507 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12508 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12509 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12510 \begin_inset Newline newline
12513 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12514 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12515 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12516 sizes than at small ones.
12517 \begin_inset Newline newline
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12539 \begin_layout Description
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12555 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12556 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12557 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12558 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12559 image manipulation program.
12560 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12561 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12565 pixels high up to 34
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12570 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12571 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12573 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12574 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12575 \begin_inset Newline newline
12578 Bitmap fonts are named
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12589 \begin_layout Standard
12590 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12591 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12592 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12593 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12594 use scalable fonts.
12597 \begin_layout Standard
12598 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12603 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12604 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12605 font to emphasize text, you use an
12606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12614 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12616 In \SpecialChar LyX
12617 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12621 \begin_layout Subsection
12624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12626 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12634 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 used its own fonts.
12636 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12637 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12642 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12643 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12644 to a word processor.
12645 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12646 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 files are very portable across
12648 different machines.
12649 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 has increased a lot
12651 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12654 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12662 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12667 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12668 code in the document
12669 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 engines that are also able directly
12675 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12677 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12679 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12681 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12682 that is installed on your system.
12683 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12695 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12696 bad metrics, and other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12704 \begin_layout Subsection
12705 Document Font and Font size
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12708 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12713 \begin_inset Index idx
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_inset Index idx
12726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 \begin_layout Standard
12736 You can set the document fonts in the
12738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12742 \begin_inset Index idx
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 Document ! Settings
12756 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12757 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12760 \begin_inset space ~
12769 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12774 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12782 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12783 This requires that you use
12795 as the output format, i.
12796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12800 \begin_inset space \space{}
12803 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12804 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12805 installed (see section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12817 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12819 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12820 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12825 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12826 cannot determine the family.
12827 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12828 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12831 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12835 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12836 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12841 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12847 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12848 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset space ~
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12888 European Computer Modern
12891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12899 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12907 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12908 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12921 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12927 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12928 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12931 \begin_layout Itemize
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12940 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12958 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12959 community in order to replace
12963 as the default font.
12964 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12965 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12968 \begin_inset space ~
12981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12982 One difference is improved kerning.
12990 \begin_layout Itemize
12991 If you do not like the look of
12999 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13010 \begin_inset space ~
13020 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13021 \begin_inset space ~
13024 serif and typewriter fonts,
13028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13036 \begin_inset space ~
13045 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13050 \begin_inset space \space{}
13058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13062 \begin_inset space \space{}
13068 \begin_inset space ~
13076 \begin_inset space ~
13086 but you can also select your own.
13087 \begin_inset Newline newline
13090 The differences between roman,
13093 \begin_inset space ~
13102 fonts are explained in section
13103 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13109 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13114 \begin_inset Newline newline
13120 \begin_inset space ~
13125 was originally designed for newspapers.
13126 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13127 into the small newspaper columns.
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13136 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13139 \begin_layout Standard
13140 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13153 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13158 depends on the class you are using.
13159 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13162 \begin_layout Standard
13163 Note that the font size is the
13168 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13169 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13170 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13171 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13180 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13181 \begin_inset space ~
13185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13187 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13194 \begin_layout Standard
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13203 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13208 serif or typewriter.
13213 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13223 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13226 \begin_layout Standard
13231 LaTeX font encoding
13233 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13234 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13240 \begin_inset Index idx
13243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13257 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13262 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13263 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13270 \begin_layout Standard
13271 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13273 Use Old Style Figures
13277 Use True Small Caps
13280 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13283 Use Old Style Figures
13285 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13287 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13299 Use True Small Caps
13301 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13302 of scaled capitals.
13303 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13304 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13307 \begin_layout Standard
13312 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13313 a font to display the script characters.
13317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13318 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13324 \begin_inset Index idx
13327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13334 So this has no effect for the document language
13348 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13352 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13360 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13365 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13366 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13368 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13370 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13373 dialog, see section
13374 \begin_inset space ~
13378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13380 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13392 \begin_layout Subsection
13396 \begin_layout Standard
13397 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13398 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13400 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13401 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13402 choose a math font in the dialog
13404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13408 \begin_inset Index idx
13411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13412 Document ! Settings
13418 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13419 automatically selects a math font.
13420 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13421 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13430 \begin_inset space ~
13436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13441 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13442 document font is available.
13445 \begin_layout Standard
13446 Note that the math font will not be used for
13450 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13456 or by the insertion of the command
13463 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13468 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13469 while the math characters do not.
13471 \begin_inset space ~
13474 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13477 \begin_inset space ~
13485 \begin_inset space ~
13490 in the document font settings.
13493 \begin_layout Standard
13494 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13495 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13496 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13497 font (in most cases
13498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13504 \begin_inset space ~
13510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13513 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13514 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13522 \begin_inset space ~
13528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13534 \begin_layout Subsection
13535 Using Different Character Styles
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13546 \begin_inset Index idx
13549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \begin_layout Standard
13559 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13560 automatically changes the character style for certain
13561 paragraph environments.
13563 supports two character styles,
13572 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13576 \begin_layout Standard
13581 style, do one of the following:
13584 \begin_layout Itemize
13585 click on the toolbar button
13594 \begin_layout Itemize
13595 use the key binding
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13605 These commands are all toggles.
13610 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 One typically uses the
13618 style for proper names.
13620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13627 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13636 A more widely used character style is the
13641 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13648 \begin_layout Itemize
13649 clicking on the toolbar button
13658 \begin_layout Itemize
13659 using the keybindings
13668 \begin_layout Standard
13673 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13675 use a different font.
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 We've been using the
13683 style all over the place in this document.
13684 Here's one more example:
13687 \begin_layout Quotation
13690 Do not overuse character styles!
13693 \begin_layout Standard
13694 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13695 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13696 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13697 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13702 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13712 \begin_inset space ~
13715 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13721 arg "dialog-show character"
13727 \begin_layout Subsection
13728 Fine-Tuning with the
13733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13735 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13740 \begin_inset Index idx
13743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13753 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13755 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13756 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13757 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13758 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13759 from ordinary dialog.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13763 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13764 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13765 \begin_inset Newline newline
13768 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13769 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13772 \begin_layout Standard
13773 To use custom character styles, open the
13775 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13777 \begin_inset space ~
13780 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13783 dialog or press the toolbar button
13786 arg "dialog-show character"
13790 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13791 font property that you can choose.
13792 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13795 \begin_inset space ~
13800 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13805 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13806 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13807 environments all at once.
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13826 \begin_layout Labeling
13827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13841 The possible options are:
13845 \begin_layout Labeling
13846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13851 This is the Roman font family.
13852 Normally a serif font.
13853 It's also the default family.
13863 \begin_layout Labeling
13864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13868 \begin_inset space ~
13875 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13887 \begin_layout Labeling
13888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13895 This is the Typewriter font family.
13901 arg "font-typewriter"
13910 \begin_layout Labeling
13911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13916 This corresponds to the print weight.
13921 \begin_layout Labeling
13922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 This is the Medium font series.
13928 It's also the default series.
13931 \begin_layout Labeling
13932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13939 This is the Bold font series.
13952 \begin_layout Labeling
13953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 As the name implies.
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13969 This is the Upright font shape.
13970 It's also the default shape.
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 s the Italic font shape
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14002 This is the Slanted font shape
14004 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14005 , this is different from italic).
14008 \begin_layout Labeling
14009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14013 \begin_inset space ~
14020 This is the Small caps font shape
14027 \begin_layout Labeling
14028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 Alters the text color.
14034 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14038 \begin_inset space ~
14043 , which means that the document default color set in
14045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14046 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14052 \begin_inset space ~
14057 is used, you can choose between
14134 \begin_inset Index idx
14137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14146 \begin_layout Labeling
14147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14152 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14153 the language of the document.
14154 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14155 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14157 \begin_inset Newline newline
14160 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14162 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14163 When using the spell checking (see section
14164 \begin_inset space ~
14168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14170 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14174 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14177 \begin_layout Labeling
14178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14183 Alters the size of the font.
14184 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14185 proportional to the document font size.
14186 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14187 the details, but a general description of what
14193 \begin_layout Labeling
14194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14215 arg "font-size tiny"
14221 \begin_layout Labeling
14222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14249 \begin_layout Labeling
14250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14277 \begin_layout Labeling
14278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14299 arg "font-size small"
14305 \begin_layout Labeling
14306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14320 It's also the default size.
14324 arg "font-size normal"
14330 \begin_layout Labeling
14331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14352 arg "font-size large"
14358 \begin_layout Labeling
14359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14380 arg "font-size larger"
14386 \begin_layout Labeling
14387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14408 arg "font-size largest"
14414 \begin_layout Labeling
14415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14436 arg "font-size huge"
14442 \begin_layout Labeling
14443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14464 arg "font-size giant"
14470 \begin_layout Labeling
14471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14476 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size increase"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14508 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size decrease"
14535 \begin_layout Standard
14540 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14541 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14543 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14544 — use those instead.
14545 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14548 \begin_layout Labeling
14549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14554 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14559 \begin_layout Labeling
14560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14567 This is text with emphasize on
14570 This might seem like the same as
14574 , but it is actually a bit different.
14580 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14582 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14585 \begin_layout Labeling
14586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14593 This is text with Underbar on.
14599 arg "font-underline"
14605 \begin_inset Newline newline
14610 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14611 when you could not change fonts.
14612 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14613 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14614 because some people
14618 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14621 \begin_layout Labeling
14622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14626 \begin_inset space ~
14633 This is text with Double underbar on.
14639 arg "font-underunderline"
14643 \begin_inset Newline newline
14646 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14647 about double underbar.
14650 \begin_layout Labeling
14651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14655 \begin_inset space ~
14662 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14668 arg "font-underwave"
14672 \begin_inset Newline newline
14675 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14676 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with Strikeout on.
14693 arg "font-strikeout"
14697 \begin_inset Newline newline
14700 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14701 changed in the meantime.
14704 \begin_layout Labeling
14705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14712 This is text with Noun on.
14719 , this is a logical attribute.
14720 Normally it's equivalent to
14723 \begin_inset space ~
14732 \begin_layout Standard
14733 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14734 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14738 \begin_inset space ~
14741 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14747 arg "dialog-show character"
14750 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14751 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14754 arg "textstyle-apply"
14758 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14762 \begin_layout Standard
14763 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14770 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14771 (suppose you just set the shape to
14772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14790 \begin_inset space ~
14802 \begin_layout Standard
14803 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14811 \begin_inset space ~
14823 \begin_layout Itemize
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14854 \begin_inset Newline newline
14858 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14872 \begin_inset Note Note
14875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14876 For more on phantoms see section
14877 \begin_inset space ~
14881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14883 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14893 \begin_inset Newline newline
14899 \begin_layout Itemize
14904 fonts use characters with serifs.
14905 These are the small
14906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14913 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14914 The following example shows the difference:
14915 \begin_inset Newline newline
14919 \begin_inset Newline newline
14924 text without serifs
14927 \begin_inset Newline newline
14930 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14931 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14938 \begin_layout Itemize
14943 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14944 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14945 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14948 \begin_layout Standard
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14957 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14960 \begin_inset space ~
14965 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14966 the property to be removed.
14967 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14968 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14969 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14987 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14988 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14996 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15005 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15016 If you, for example, set
15017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 \begin_inset space ~
15040 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15049 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15052 \begin_layout Standard
15053 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15054 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15057 \begin_layout Section
15058 Printing and Previewing
15061 \begin_layout Subsection
15065 \begin_layout Standard
15066 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15067 using \SpecialChar LyX
15068 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15069 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15070 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15071 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15073 Additional Features
15078 \begin_layout Standard
15080 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15083 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15084 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15085 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15088 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15089 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15090 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15091 to turn your writing into printable output.
15092 This happens in two stages:
15095 \begin_layout Enumerate
15096 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15097 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15099 a file with the extension,
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15114 \begin_layout Enumerate
15115 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15116 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15117 to use the commands in the
15121 file to produce printable output.
15124 \begin_layout Subsection
15125 Output file formats
15126 \begin_inset Index idx
15129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15138 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15146 Simple text (ASCII)
15147 \begin_inset Index idx
15150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15151 File formats ! ASCII
15159 \begin_layout Standard
15160 This file type has the extension
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15173 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15177 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15185 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15188 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15196 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15197 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15198 bibliography (section
15199 \begin_inset space ~
15203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15205 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15210 If your document includes such material, use
15212 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15213 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15215 \begin_inset space ~
15219 \begin_inset space ~
15223 \begin_inset space ~
15231 \begin_inset space ~
15235 \begin_inset space ~
15241 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15242 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15248 \begin_inset Index idx
15251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15252 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15261 \begin_layout Standard
15262 This file type has the extension
15263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15274 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15277 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15278 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15279 -Errors or to process it manually
15280 with console commands.
15281 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15282 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15283 's temporary directory whenever you
15284 view or export your document.
15287 \begin_layout Standard
15288 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15289 -file using the menu
15291 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15292 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15296 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15297 export variants are explained in section
15298 \begin_inset space ~
15302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15304 reference "subsec:Export"
15311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15313 \begin_inset Index idx
15316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15325 \begin_layout Standard
15326 This file type has the extension
15327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15347 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15348 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15349 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15353 \begin_layout Standard
15354 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15355 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15356 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15357 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15358 when you view the DVI.
15359 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15362 \begin_layout Standard
15363 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15365 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15366 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15371 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15372 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15374 \begin_inset space ~
15380 The latter option uses the program
15382 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15388 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15391 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15392 font access (see section
15393 \begin_inset space ~
15397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15399 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15404 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15405 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15412 \begin_inset Index idx
15415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15416 File formats ! PostScript
15424 \begin_layout Standard
15425 This file type has the extension
15426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15438 PostScript was developed by the company
15442 as a printer language.
15443 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15445 PostScript can be seen as a
15446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15449 programming language
15450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15453 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15458 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15465 \begin_inset Index idx
15468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15470 packages ! pstricks
15480 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15488 Encapsulated PostScript
15489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15492 (EPS, file extension
15493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15505 As \SpecialChar LyX
15506 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15507 convert them in the background to EPS.
15508 If, for example, you have 50
15509 \begin_inset space ~
15512 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15514 \begin_inset space ~
15517 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15518 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15520 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15521 EPS to avoid this problem.
15524 \begin_layout Standard
15525 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15527 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15528 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15536 \begin_inset Index idx
15539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15546 \begin_inset Index idx
15549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15559 This file type has the extension
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15576 Portable Document Format
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15584 was derived from PostScript.
15585 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15594 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15595 looks exactly the same.
15598 \begin_layout Standard
15599 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15603 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15607 (JPG, file extension
15608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15635 Portable Network Graphics
15636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15639 (PNG, file extension
15640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15653 converts them in the
15654 background to one of these formats.
15655 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15656 will slow down your workflow.
15657 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15660 \begin_layout Standard
15661 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15663 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15669 \begin_layout Description
15671 \begin_inset space ~
15674 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15678 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15681 \begin_layout Description
15683 \begin_inset space ~
15690 ) This uses the program
15692 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15695 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15698 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15701 is a new engine, derived from
15705 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15706 access (see section
15707 \begin_inset space ~
15711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15713 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15718 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15719 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15724 \begin_layout Description
15726 \begin_inset space ~
15733 ) This uses the program
15738 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15744 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15745 font access (see section
15746 \begin_inset space ~
15750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15752 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15757 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15758 vertically written Japanese.
15761 \begin_layout Description
15763 \begin_inset space ~
15766 (cropped) This is the same as
15769 \begin_inset space ~
15774 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15775 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15776 to generate good-looking
15777 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15780 \begin_layout Description
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15785 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15789 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15793 \begin_layout Description
15795 \begin_inset space ~
15798 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15802 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15803 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15807 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15808 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15811 \begin_layout Standard
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15824 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15825 works without problems.
15826 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15827 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15831 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15844 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15854 \begin_inset Index idx
15857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15858 FileFormats ! XHTML
15864 \begin_inset Index idx
15867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15876 \begin_layout Standard
15877 This file type has the extension
15878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15890 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15891 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15892 When \SpecialChar LyX
15893 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15894 suitable for the purpose.
15895 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15898 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15901 between different formats, which are described in section
15903 Math Output in XHTML
15908 \begin_inset space ~
15916 \begin_layout Standard
15917 XHTML output remains
15918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15925 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15926 features are supported yet.
15930 and the World Wide Web
15934 Additional Features
15936 manual, for more information.
15939 \begin_layout Standard
15940 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15942 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15943 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15949 \begin_layout Subsection
15951 \begin_inset Index idx
15954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15963 \begin_layout Standard
15964 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15965 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15974 or use the toolbar button
15981 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15982 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15989 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15993 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15995 \begin_inset space ~
15999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16001 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16006 Further output formats can be selected via
16008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16009 View (Other Formats)
16011 or the toolbar button
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16022 viewer window using the menu
16024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16030 Update (Other Formats)
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16036 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16039 To have a real output, export your document.
16042 \begin_layout Section
16043 A few Words about Typography
16044 \begin_inset Index idx
16047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16056 \begin_layout Subsection
16057 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16058 \begin_inset Index idx
16061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16068 \begin_inset Index idx
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 In \SpecialChar LyX
16083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 character comes in four variants: the
16111 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16117 \begin_layout Standard
16118 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16128 height_special "totalheight"
16133 backgroundcolor "none"
16136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 \begin_inset Tabular
16138 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16139 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16140 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16141 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16142 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16143 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16172 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16212 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16235 system key combination
16239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16240 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16244 and the em dash with
16246 Shift-Option-hyphen
16252 is the Mac label for the right
16261 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16265 \begin_inset space ~
16268 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16280 function with the Unicode code as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16300 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16301 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16323 system key combination or
16324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16351 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16390 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16396 \begin_layout Standard
16397 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16398 mode and has a length of its own.
16399 Here are some examples:
16402 \begin_layout Enumerate
16403 line- and page-breaks
16404 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16414 \begin_layout Enumerate
16416 \begin_inset space ~
16420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16430 \begin_layout Enumerate
16431 Dashes indicate interruptions, performing a function related to – but subtly
16432 different from – parentheses.
16433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16444 \begin_layout Standard
16445 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16457 \begin_layout Enumerate
16458 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16462 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16472 \begin_layout Standard
16474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16476 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16477 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16483 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710179
16487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16489 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938327
16490 Dashes and line breaks
16491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16493 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16500 \begin_layout Standard
16502 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686237
16503 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16507 \begin_layout Itemize
16509 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504302249
16510 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16515 \begin_layout Itemize
16517 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504537660
16518 In English, lines may break after dashes used to set off parenthetical statement
16522 \begin_layout Itemize
16524 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504678633
16525 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16526 similar to quote signs and line breaks are not allowed on the
16527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16537 \begin_layout Standard
16539 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711768
16540 When using spaced en dashes
16541 \begin_inset space ~
16544 - common in British English
16545 \begin_inset space ~
16548 - prevent line breaks before the dash with protected spaces.
16551 \begin_layout Standard
16553 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686608
16554 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16555 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16560 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16561 Optional line break
16566 \begin_layout Standard
16568 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708653
16569 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select
16571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16573 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16574 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16577 This forces output of dashes as
16578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16593 when exporting to LaTeX.
16594 The TeX font ligature mechanism convertes them to dash characters followed
16595 by an optional line break.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16600 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504003320
16606 \begin_layout Enumerate
16608 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686268
16609 This results in optional line breaks after
16614 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox or preceding
16625 \begin_layout Quote
16627 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539888
16629 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16639 height_special "totalheight"
16644 backgroundcolor "none"
16647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16649 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504013627
16659 \begin_layout Standard
16661 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539962
16663 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16673 height_special "totalheight"
16678 backgroundcolor "none"
16681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16683 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504539973
16685 \begin_inset space ~
16693 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16697 – sont très utiles.
16701 \begin_layout Quote
16703 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686902
16708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16710 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504246896
16721 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16724 \begin_layout Standard
16726 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504708818
16727 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16731 – in contrast to an overfull line
16732 \begin_inset space ~
16735 – it does not trigger a warning in the LaTeX log.
16739 \begin_layout Enumerate
16741 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504012609
16742 The setting is ignored for documents using non-TeX fonts.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16748 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709863
16753 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16757 \begin_inset Newline newline
16764 XeTeXdashbreakstate=1
16766 , causes literal dashes to behave like
16767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16780 \begin_layout Enumerate
16782 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504686210
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16802 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504003612
16803 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and
16804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16814 \begin_layout Standard
16816 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709020
16820 \begin_layout Labeling
16821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16823 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
16825 \begin_inset space ~
16828 2.2 -- and --- in the LyX source are output as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent
16829 ligation to dashes.
16833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16835 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711038
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16840 2.1, -- and --- in the LyX source was output
16841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16848 which led to different look in the GUI, text, or HTML vs.
16849 documents compiled with LaTeX.
16857 Occurences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes [
16858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16860 name "changeset 8aa37c43"
16861 target "http://www.lyx.org/trac/changeset/8aa37c43/lyxgit"
16870 \begin_layout Itemize
16872 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709468
16873 In some cases this leads to different line breaks.
16877 \begin_layout Itemize
16879 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710005
16880 It is no longer possible to differentiate dashes with/without optional line
16881 break using --- and -- vs.
16883 Either convert one sort to ERT or insert optional line break characters.
16889 \begin_layout Labeling
16890 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16892 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710385
16894 \begin_inset space ~
16899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16901 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16902 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16905 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with LyX 2.2.
16910 \begin_layout Itemize
16912 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16913 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-2.2 documents, you must manually
16914 unselect it to ensure unchanged behaviour.
16917 \begin_layout Itemize
16919 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16920 ZWSP characters (u200b) following literal em- and en-dashes are deleted
16921 by lyx2lyx when converting to 2.3 format.
16922 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16923 space insets before opening your document with LyX 2.3 or the optional line
16924 breaks will be lost!
16927 \begin_layout Itemize
16929 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709574
16930 As with all settings, the default for new documents can be configured via
16935 \begin_layout Subsection
16937 \begin_inset Index idx
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16949 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16956 \begin_layout Standard
16957 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16958 but automatically in the output.
16959 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16965 \begin_inset Index idx
16968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16975 following the rules of the document language.
16978 \begin_layout Standard
16980 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16984 font and with unusual constructs, like
16985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16993 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16994 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16995 This is done with the menu
16997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16998 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17006 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17008 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17013 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17014 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17025 would then see the hyphen
17026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 as a hyphenation possibility.
17034 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17035 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17039 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17042 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17044 Prevent Hyphenation
17049 \begin_inset space ~
17057 \begin_layout Subsection
17059 \begin_inset Index idx
17062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17072 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17075 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17082 \begin_layout Standard
17083 When \SpecialChar LyX
17084 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17085 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17087 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17093 appropriate amount of space.
17094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17099 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17100 gets after another word.
17103 \begin_layout Standard
17104 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17105 not work in all cases.
17107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17118 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17119 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17122 \begin_layout Standard
17123 Here are some examples of
17127 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17130 \begin_layout Itemize
17135 \begin_layout Itemize
17140 \begin_layout Standard
17141 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17144 \begin_layout Itemize
17146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17150 this is too much space!
17153 \begin_layout Itemize
17158 \begin_layout Standard
17159 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17166 \begin_layout Enumerate
17170 \begin_inset space ~
17175 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17176 \begin_inset space ~
17180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17182 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17187 \begin_inset Index idx
17190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17191 Spaces ! inter-word
17199 \begin_layout Enumerate
17203 \begin_inset space ~
17208 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17209 \begin_inset space ~
17213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17215 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17220 \begin_inset Index idx
17223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17232 \begin_layout Enumerate
17236 \begin_inset space ~
17240 \begin_inset space ~
17244 \begin_inset space ~
17251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17253 \begin_inset space ~
17258 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17259 This function is also bound to
17262 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17268 \begin_layout Standard
17269 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17272 \begin_layout Itemize
17274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17278 \begin_inset space \space{}
17281 this is too much space!
17284 \begin_layout Itemize
17285 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17289 \begin_layout Standard
17290 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17291 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17293 will take care of this.
17296 \begin_layout Standard
17297 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17301 \begin_inset space ~
17307 feature described in the section
17309 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17314 Additional Features
17319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17321 \begin_inset Index idx
17324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17325 Typography ! Quotation marks
17331 \begin_inset Index idx
17334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17335 Quotation marks | see
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17365 \begin_layout Standard
17367 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17368 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17369 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17379 The keyboard character,
17383 , generates this automatically.
17386 \begin_layout Standard
17387 You can specify what character the
17391 key produces by using the submenu
17397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17401 \begin_inset Index idx
17404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17405 Document ! Settings
17410 dialog and switching the
17414 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17415 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17417 \begin_inset space ~
17423 \begin_layout Labeling
17424 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17436 \begin_inset space ~
17440 \begin_inset space ~
17444 \begin_inset Quotes els
17448 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17462 \begin_inset Quotes els
17466 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17469 quotation marks (as common, e.
17470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17476 \begin_layout Labeling
17477 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17480 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17484 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17488 \begin_inset space ~
17492 \begin_inset space ~
17496 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17500 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17506 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17510 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17514 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17518 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17521 quotation marks (as common, e.
17522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17528 \begin_layout Labeling
17529 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17532 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17540 \begin_inset space ~
17544 \begin_inset space ~
17548 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17552 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17558 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17562 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17566 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17570 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17573 quotation marks (as common, e.
17574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17580 \begin_layout Labeling
17581 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17584 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17588 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17592 \begin_inset space ~
17596 \begin_inset space ~
17600 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17604 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17610 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17614 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17618 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17622 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17625 quotation marks (as common, e.
17626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17632 \begin_layout Labeling
17633 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17636 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17644 \begin_inset space ~
17648 \begin_inset space ~
17652 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17656 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17662 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17670 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17674 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17677 quotation marks (as common, e.
17678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17681 g., in Switzerland)
17684 \begin_layout Labeling
17685 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17688 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17692 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17696 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset space ~
17704 \begin_inset Quotes als
17708 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17714 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17718 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17722 \begin_inset Quotes als
17726 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17729 quotation marks (as common, e.
17730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17736 \begin_layout Labeling
17737 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17740 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17744 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17748 \begin_inset space ~
17752 \begin_inset space ~
17756 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17760 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17766 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17770 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17774 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17778 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17781 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17784 \begin_layout Labeling
17785 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17788 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17792 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17796 \begin_inset space ~
17800 \begin_inset space ~
17804 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17808 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17814 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17818 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17822 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17826 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17829 quotation marks (as common, e.
17830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17833 g., in Great Britain)
17836 \begin_layout Labeling
17837 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17840 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17844 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17848 \begin_inset space ~
17852 \begin_inset space ~
17856 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17860 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17866 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17870 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17874 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17878 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17881 quotation marks (as common, e.
17882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17888 \begin_layout Labeling
17889 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17892 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17896 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17900 \begin_inset space ~
17904 \begin_inset space ~
17908 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17912 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17918 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17922 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17926 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17930 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17933 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17938 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17939 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17940 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17941 the inner marks differ).
17949 \begin_layout Labeling
17950 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17953 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17957 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17961 \begin_inset space ~
17965 \begin_inset space ~
17969 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17973 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17979 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17983 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17987 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17991 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17994 quotation marks (as common, e.
17995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18001 \begin_layout Labeling
18002 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18005 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18009 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18017 \begin_inset space ~
18021 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18025 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18031 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18039 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18043 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18046 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18049 \begin_layout Labeling
18050 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18051 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18059 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18065 \begin_inset space ~
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18075 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18083 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18087 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18091 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18095 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18099 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18102 quotation marks (as common, e.
18103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18111 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18112 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18120 \begin_layout Labeling
18121 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18122 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18130 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18140 \begin_inset space ~
18146 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18154 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18158 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18162 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18166 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18170 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18173 quotation marks (as common, e.
18174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18177 g., in North Korea and China)
18181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18182 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18183 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18191 \begin_layout Standard
18192 Inner quotation marks
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18197 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18198 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18199 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18207 does not necessarily mean
18208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18216 This is why we call them
18217 \begin_inset Quotes els
18221 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18237 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18239 \begin_inset Quotes els
18243 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18246 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18249 arg "quote-insert inner"
18254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18260 \begin_layout Standard
18261 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18262 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18263 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18264 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18265 If you check the setting
18267 Use dynamic quotation marks
18271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18275 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18276 they appear in a special color).
18277 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18278 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18283 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18286 \begin_layout Standard
18287 Individual quotation marks (i.
18288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18291 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18292 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18296 \begin_layout Subsection
18298 \begin_inset Index idx
18301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 Typography ! Ligatures
18308 \begin_inset Index idx
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18342 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18349 \begin_layout Standard
18350 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18351 print them as single characters.
18352 These groups are known as
18357 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18358 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18360 Here are the standard ligatures:
18363 \begin_layout Itemize
18367 \begin_layout Itemize
18371 \begin_layout Itemize
18375 \begin_layout Itemize
18379 \begin_layout Itemize
18383 \begin_layout Standard
18384 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18387 \begin_layout Standard
18388 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18389 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18397 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 To break a ligature, use
18415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18418 \begin_inset space ~
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18436 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18453 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18461 \begin_layout Subsection
18463 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18465 \begin_inset Index idx
18468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18478 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18485 \begin_layout Standard
18488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18489 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18493 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18496 \begin_layout Description
18498 The name of the game.
18501 \begin_layout Description
18503 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18507 \begin_layout Description
18509 The \SpecialChar TeX
18510 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18514 \begin_layout Description
18515 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18516 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18527 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18536 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18537 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18538 converges to the number
18539 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18542 : The actual version is
18543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18551 , the previous one was
18552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18563 \begin_layout Subsection
18565 \begin_inset Index idx
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 \begin_layout Standard
18578 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18579 space between two words.
18580 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18590 for units use the menu
18592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18593 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18595 \begin_inset space ~
18603 arg "space-insert thin"
18609 \begin_layout Standard
18610 Here is an example to show the differences:
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 \begin_inset Tabular
18615 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18616 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18617 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18629 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 space between number and unit
18648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18657 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 half space between number and unit
18682 \begin_layout Subsection
18684 \begin_inset Index idx
18687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18696 \begin_layout Standard
18697 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18699 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18700 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18701 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18702 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18703 These bits of text became known as
18714 \begin_layout Standard
18715 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18716 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18717 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18718 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18719 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18720 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18721 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18722 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18723 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18724 \begin_inset Newline newline
18732 \begin_inset Newline newline
18740 \begin_inset Newline newline
18743 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18744 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18745 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18753 key "latexcompanion"
18759 \begin_inset space ~
18763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18770 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18771 's page break mechanism.
18774 \begin_layout Chapter
18775 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18778 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18785 \begin_layout Standard
18786 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18789 \begin_inset space ~
18795 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18798 \begin_layout Section
18800 \begin_inset Index idx
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18819 \begin_layout Standard
18821 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18824 \begin_layout Description
18827 \begin_inset space ~
18830 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18831 \begin_inset Newline newline
18835 \begin_inset Note Note
18838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18847 \begin_layout Description
18848 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18849 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18850 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18853 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18854 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18862 \begin_inset Newline newline
18866 \begin_inset Note Comment
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18870 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18879 \begin_layout Description
18881 \begin_inset space ~
18884 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18885 set in the document settings under
18887 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18889 \begin_inset space ~
18895 \begin_inset Newline newline
18899 \begin_inset Newline newline
18903 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18912 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18913 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18918 of a comment that appears in the output.
18924 \begin_inset Newline newline
18928 \begin_inset Newline newline
18931 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18934 \begin_layout Standard
18935 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18947 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18950 \begin_layout Section
18952 \begin_inset Index idx
18955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18964 name "sec:Footnotes"
18971 \begin_layout Standard
18973 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18979 or the toolbar button
18982 arg "footnote-insert"
18994 \begin_inset Graphics
18995 filename clipart/footnote.png
19004 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19005 's representation of your footnote.
19015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19034 label, the box will
19038 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19039 Clicking on the box label again will close
19052 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19053 and click on the footnote
19068 \begin_layout Standard
19069 Here is an example footnote:
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19078 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19087 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19088 position where the footnote box is placed.
19089 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19090 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19091 according to the document class.
19093 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19094 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19100 ey are described in the
19103 \begin_inset space ~
19111 \begin_layout Section
19113 \begin_inset Index idx
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19125 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19132 \begin_layout Standard
19133 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19135 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19139 \begin_inset space ~
19144 or the toolbar button
19147 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19173 appearing within your text.
19174 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19175 's representation of your margin
19184 \begin_layout Standard
19185 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19189 \begin_inset Marginal
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 This is a marginal note.
19202 \begin_layout Standard
19203 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19204 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19205 pages, right on odd pages.
19208 \begin_layout Standard
19209 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset space ~
19228 \begin_layout Section
19229 Graphics and Images
19230 \begin_inset Index idx
19233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19240 \begin_inset Index idx
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19252 name "sec:Graphics"
19259 \begin_layout Standard
19260 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19261 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19264 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19273 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19276 \begin_layout Standard
19277 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19282 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19283 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19285 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19292 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19299 \begin_layout Standard
19304 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19305 of the image in the output.
19306 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19310 \begin_inset space ~
19314 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19336 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19337 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19345 \begin_layout Standard
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19353 \begin_inset space ~
19358 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19359 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19361 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19366 \begin_inset space ~
19371 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19372 with the image size is printed.
19375 \begin_layout Standard
19376 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19377 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19379 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19382 \begin_layout Standard
19384 \begin_inset Graphics
19385 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19393 \begin_layout Standard
19394 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19395 the image into a float, see section
19396 \begin_inset space ~
19400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19402 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19409 \begin_layout Subsection
19411 \begin_inset Index idx
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19423 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19430 \begin_layout Standard
19431 You can insert images in any known file format.
19432 But as we explained in section
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19439 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19443 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19445 therefore uses the program
19449 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19450 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19451 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19452 \begin_inset space ~
19456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19458 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19465 \begin_layout Standard
19466 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19469 \begin_layout Description
19471 \begin_inset space ~
19474 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19475 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19476 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19480 Graphics Interchange Format
19481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19484 (GIF, file extension
19485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19497 \begin_inset Index idx
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19532 Portable Network Graphics
19533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19536 (PNG, file extension
19537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19549 \begin_inset Index idx
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19584 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19588 (JPG, file extension
19589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19613 \begin_inset Index idx
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 \begin_layout Description
19649 \begin_inset space ~
19652 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19654 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19655 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19656 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19657 \begin_inset Newline newline
19660 Scalable image formats can be
19661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19664 Scalable Vector Graphics
19665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19668 (SVG, file extension
19669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19681 \begin_inset Index idx
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19716 Encapsulated PostScript
19717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19720 (EPS, file extension
19721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19768 Portable Document Format
19769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19772 (PDF, file extension
19773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19785 \begin_inset Index idx
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19803 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19804 result will not be scalable.
19805 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19819 \begin_layout Standard
19820 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19827 \begin_layout Subsection
19828 Grouping of Image Settings
19829 \begin_inset Index idx
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 Images ! Settings grouping
19841 \begin_layout Standard
19842 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19844 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19845 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19847 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19848 need to manually change each of them.
19852 \begin_layout Standard
19853 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19856 \begin_inset space ~
19860 \begin_inset space ~
19872 \begin_inset space ~
19876 \begin_inset space ~
19882 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19883 and checking the name of the desired group.
19886 \begin_layout Section
19888 \begin_inset Index idx
19891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19907 \begin_layout Standard
19908 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19911 arg "tabular-insert"
19916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19920 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19921 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19922 from the rest of the table.
19923 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19924 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19926 Here is an example table:
19929 \begin_layout Standard
19931 \begin_inset Tabular
19932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 \begin_layout Subsection
20141 \begin_layout Standard
20142 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20145 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20149 This brings up the table dialog.
20150 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20151 cursor is placed currently.
20152 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20153 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20154 done on all of your selection.
20157 \begin_layout Standard
20158 In addition to the table dialog, the
20161 \begin_inset space ~
20166 helps you in setting table properties.
20167 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20170 \begin_layout Standard
20174 \begin_inset space ~
20179 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20180 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20181 current cell respectively.
20182 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20184 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20185 of text, see section
20186 \begin_inset space ~
20190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20192 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20199 \begin_layout Standard
20200 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20201 using the check box
20210 This will merge the cells to
20214 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20215 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20216 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20217 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20218 in the last row without the upper border:
20221 \begin_layout Standard
20223 \begin_inset Tabular
20224 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20225 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20226 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20227 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20228 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20229 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 \begin_layout Standard
20361 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20362 -arguments for the table.
20363 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20364 explained in the chapter
20371 \begin_inset space ~
20377 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20378 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20379 but are visible in the output.
20382 \begin_layout Standard
20383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 Most DVI-viewers are
20395 able to display rotations.
20403 \begin_layout Standard
20408 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20413 adds lines for all cell borders.
20416 \begin_layout Subsection
20418 \begin_inset Index idx
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 Tables ! Multi-page
20428 \begin_inset Index idx
20431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 \begin_layout Standard
20441 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20444 \begin_inset space ~
20448 \begin_inset space ~
20456 \begin_inset space ~
20461 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20462 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20465 \begin_layout Description
20470 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20471 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20472 Except for the first page, if
20475 \begin_inset space ~
20483 \begin_layout Description
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20492 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20493 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20496 \begin_layout Description
20501 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20502 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20503 except for the last page, if
20506 \begin_inset space ~
20514 \begin_layout Description
20518 \begin_inset space ~
20523 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20524 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20527 \begin_layout Description
20528 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20529 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20535 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20538 \begin_inset space ~
20546 \begin_layout Standard
20547 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20548 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20549 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20555 In this context, first means first in this order:
20558 \begin_inset space ~
20570 \begin_inset space ~
20575 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20578 \begin_layout Standard
20580 \begin_inset Tabular
20581 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20582 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20583 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20584 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20585 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20586 <row endfirsthead="true">
20587 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20598 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <row endfirsthead="true">
20618 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <row endhead="true">
20651 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <row endhead="true">
20682 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <row endfoot="true">
20715 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21707 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <row endlastfoot="true">
22697 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 \begin_layout Subsection
22736 \begin_inset Index idx
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22748 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22757 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22758 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22759 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22763 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22766 \begin_layout Standard
22767 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22768 for the column in the table dialog.
22769 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22770 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22774 \begin_layout Standard
22776 \begin_inset Tabular
22777 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22778 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22779 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22780 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22781 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 This is longer now.
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22983 This is longer now.
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23014 \begin_layout Standard
23015 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23016 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23022 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23028 Selection with the mouse or with
23032 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23033 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23034 the selection from outside the table.
23037 \begin_layout Section
23039 \begin_inset Index idx
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23058 \begin_layout Subsection
23062 \begin_layout Standard
23063 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23064 have a fixed location.
23066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23073 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23081 \begin_inset space ~
23086 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23087 too many notes on the current page.
23090 \begin_layout Standard
23091 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23092 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23093 and pages without text.
23094 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23095 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23096 Floats are therefore numbered.
23097 Referencing is described in section
23098 \begin_inset space ~
23102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23104 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23111 \begin_layout Standard
23112 To insert a float, use the menu
23114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23118 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23119 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23121 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23122 \begin_inset Index idx
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23132 paragraph within the float.
23133 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23134 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23135 left-clicking on the box label.
23136 A closed float box looks like this:
23137 \begin_inset Graphics
23138 filename clipart/float.png
23143 – a gray button with a red label.
23146 \begin_layout Standard
23147 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23149 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23152 \begin_layout Subsection
23154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23156 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23161 \begin_inset Index idx
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 Floats ! Figure floats
23173 \begin_layout Standard
23175 \begin_inset space ~
23179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23181 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23185 was created using the menu
23187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23188 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23194 arg "float-insert figure"
23198 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23207 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23211 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23212 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23216 \begin_inset space ~
23224 arg "layout-paragraph"
23230 \begin_layout Standard
23231 \begin_inset Float figure
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 \begin_inset Graphics
23239 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23254 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23258 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23272 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23273 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23284 ) and refer to it using the menu
23286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23292 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23296 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23297 vague references like
23298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23305 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23306 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23316 For more about cross-references, see section
23317 \begin_inset space ~
23321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23323 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23330 \begin_layout Standard
23331 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23332 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23333 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23334 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23335 as described in section
23336 \begin_inset space ~
23340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23342 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23348 \begin_inset space ~
23352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23354 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23358 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23359 You can also set the images one below the other.
23361 \begin_inset space ~
23365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23367 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23374 reference "fig:Platypus"
23378 are the subfigures.
23381 \begin_layout Standard
23382 \begin_inset Float figure
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23392 \begin_inset Float figure
23397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23403 name "fig:Undefinable"
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 \begin_inset Graphics
23417 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23432 \begin_inset Float figure
23437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23443 name "fig:Platypus"
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 \begin_inset Graphics
23457 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23469 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23481 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23485 Two distorted images.
23498 \begin_layout Subsection
23500 \begin_inset Index idx
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 Floats ! Table floats
23512 \begin_layout Standard
23513 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23516 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23519 or the toolbar button
23522 arg "float-insert table"
23526 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23527 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23528 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23530 \begin_inset space ~
23534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23536 reference "tab:Table-float"
23543 \begin_layout Standard
23544 \begin_inset Float table
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23555 name "tab:Table-float"
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23569 \begin_inset Tabular
23570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23573 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23725 \end{array}\right]$
23733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23767 \begin_layout Subsection
23769 \begin_inset Index idx
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 \begin_layout Standard
23783 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23784 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23785 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23787 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23795 \begin_inset space ~
23803 \begin_layout Section
23805 \begin_inset Index idx
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 \begin_layout Standard
23819 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23821 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23822 \begin_inset space \space{}
23829 \begin_layout Standard
23830 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23831 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23833 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23837 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23838 and its alignment within the page.
23841 \begin_layout Standard
23843 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23853 height_special "totalheight"
23858 backgroundcolor "none"
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 This is a minipage.
23865 The text is set in an italic style.
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23872 another formatting.
23880 \begin_layout Standard
23881 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23884 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23888 as described in section
23889 \begin_inset space ~
23893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23895 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23900 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23906 \begin_layout Standard
23907 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23917 height_special "totalheight"
23922 backgroundcolor "none"
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23927 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23933 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23937 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23947 height_special "totalheight"
23952 backgroundcolor "none"
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23957 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23965 \begin_layout Standard
23966 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23972 \begin_layout Standard
23973 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23975 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23982 \begin_inset space ~
23990 \begin_layout Chapter
23991 Mathematical Formulas
23992 \begin_inset Index idx
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 \begin_inset Index idx
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24036 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24043 \begin_layout Standard
24044 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24049 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24052 \begin_layout Section
24054 \begin_inset Index idx
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 \begin_layout Standard
24067 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24080 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24082 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24083 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24084 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24092 \begin_layout Standard
24093 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24097 \begin_inset space ~
24102 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24105 \begin_layout Standard
24106 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24107 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24110 \begin_layout Standard
24111 This is a line with an inline formula
24112 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24118 \begin_layout Standard
24119 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24120 paragraph, like this one:
24121 \begin_inset Formula
24128 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24131 \begin_layout Standard
24133 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24135 For example, typing
24136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24149 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24150 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24154 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24157 \begin_inset space ~
24165 \begin_layout Subsection
24166 Navigating in Formulas
24167 \begin_inset Index idx
24170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 \begin_layout Standard
24180 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24181 achieved with the arrow keys.
24183 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24184 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24189 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24190 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24194 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24198 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24201 \end{array}\right]$
24209 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24214 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24215 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24218 \begin_layout Standard
24223 , printed in this document as
24224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24228 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24235 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24236 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24237 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24242 For example, if you want
24243 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24251 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24261 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24270 , since in the latter case only the
24273 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24278 will be under the square root sign:
24279 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24285 \begin_layout Standard
24286 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24288 \begin_inset Formula
24290 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24299 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24300 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24303 \begin_layout Subsection
24307 \begin_layout Standard
24308 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24309 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24313 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24314 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24315 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24316 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24317 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24321 \begin_layout Subsection
24322 Exponents and Subscripts
24323 \begin_inset Index idx
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24333 \begin_inset Index idx
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24345 \begin_layout Standard
24346 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24349 arg "math-superscript"
24355 arg "math-subscript"
24358 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24360 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24363 , type in a formula
24366 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24376 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24382 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24386 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24392 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24398 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24407 , you have to use an extra
24411 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24412 For example, if you want
24413 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24419 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24425 Subscripts are similar: To get
24426 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24432 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24440 \begin_layout Subsection
24442 \begin_inset Index idx
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24454 \begin_layout Standard
24455 Create a fraction either with the command
24461 or by using the icon
24464 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24470 \begin_inset space ~
24476 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24477 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24478 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24483 To move back up, press
24488 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24489 \begin_inset Formula
24491 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24494 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24502 \begin_layout Subsection
24504 \begin_inset Index idx
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24517 Roots can be created using the
24520 \begin_inset space ~
24528 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24534 arg "math-insert \\root"
24556 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24562 always produces a square root.
24565 \begin_layout Subsection
24566 Operators with Limits
24567 \begin_inset Index idx
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 \begin_inset Index idx
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24589 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24598 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24602 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24605 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24606 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24607 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24608 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24609 The sum operator will automatically place its
24610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24617 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24619 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24623 \begin_inset Formula
24625 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24630 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24634 \begin_layout Standard
24635 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24637 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24638 behind the operator and using the menu
24640 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24641 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24643 \begin_inset space ~
24647 \begin_inset space ~
24661 \begin_layout Standard
24662 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24671 \begin_inset Index idx
24674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 \begin_inset Formula
24683 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24688 which will place the
24689 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24701 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24702 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24708 \begin_layout Standard
24709 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24716 Have a look at section
24717 \begin_inset space ~
24721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24723 reference "subsec:Functions"
24727 for an explanation of function macros.
24730 \begin_layout Subsection
24732 \begin_inset Index idx
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24744 \begin_layout Standard
24745 Most math symbols can be found in the
24748 \begin_inset space ~
24753 under one of several categories; including
24770 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24774 \begin_layout Standard
24775 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24776 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24777 don't have to use the
24780 \begin_inset space ~
24785 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24787 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24790 \begin_layout Subsection
24792 \begin_inset Index idx
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 \begin_layout Standard
24805 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24811 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24817 \begin_inset space ~
24825 arg "math-insert \\space"
24829 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24830 For example, the sequence
24835 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24838 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24840 \begin_inset Graphics
24841 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24846 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24847 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24848 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24849 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24850 , because they are negative
24852 Here are two examples:
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24865 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24871 \begin_layout Standard
24881 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24887 \begin_layout Subsection
24889 \begin_inset Index idx
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24901 name "subsec:Functions"
24908 \begin_layout Standard
24912 \begin_inset space ~
24917 contains under the button
24920 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24923 a number of function macros, such as
24924 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24928 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24936 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24943 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24944 avoid confusions, because
24945 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24949 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24955 \begin_layout Standard
24956 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24958 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24962 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24968 \begin_layout Standard
24969 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24970 are placed, as described in section
24971 \begin_inset space ~
24975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24977 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24984 \begin_layout Subsection
24986 \begin_inset Index idx
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25001 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25002 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25003 commands, for example, to enter
25004 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25007 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25008 Our example is entered by typing
25013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25020 \begin_inset space ~
25024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25026 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25030 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25033 \begin_layout Standard
25034 \begin_inset Float table
25039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25045 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25049 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 \begin_inset Tabular
25060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25202 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25650 \begin_inset space ~
25658 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25661 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25665 \begin_layout Section
25666 Brackets and Delimiters
25667 \begin_inset Index idx
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25677 \begin_inset Index idx
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25689 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25699 For some purposes, using just the keys
25704 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25705 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25706 toolbar delimiter icon
25709 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25713 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25714 \begin_inset Formula
25716 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25724 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25725 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25729 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25732 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25738 \begin_inset Formula
25740 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25748 \begin_layout Standard
25749 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25750 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25756 left side and right side.
25757 If you use the option
25760 \begin_inset space ~
25765 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25766 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25768 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25773 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25774 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25777 \begin_layout Standard
25778 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25779 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25780 is to go inside the brackets.
25781 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25786 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25787 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25788 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25792 arg "math-delim ( )"
25798 \begin_layout Section
25799 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25800 \begin_inset Index idx
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 \begin_inset Index idx
25813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25820 \begin_inset Index idx
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25824 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25832 \begin_layout Standard
25833 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25837 \begin_inset space ~
25845 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25849 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25850 Here is an example:
25851 \begin_inset Formula
25853 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25862 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25863 \begin_inset space ~
25867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25869 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25874 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25875 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25876 This alignment is set in the box
25881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25930 for every column as default.
25931 For example, the sequence
25932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25943 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25944 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25945 corresponds to the relevant column.
25946 The result will look like this:
25947 \begin_inset Formula
25950 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25951 column & has & has\,right\\
25952 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25961 \begin_layout Standard
25962 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25965 arg "newline-insert newline"
25968 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25969 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25974 or the math toolbar.
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25978 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25979 It can be created with the menu
25981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25982 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25984 \begin_inset space ~
25996 Here is an example:
25997 \begin_inset Formula
26011 \begin_layout Standard
26012 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26015 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26018 arg "newline-insert newline"
26022 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26027 arg "newline-insert newline"
26030 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26038 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26039 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26040 A new row is created by every further entry of
26043 arg "newline-insert newline"
26047 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26048 Here is an example:
26049 \begin_inset Formula
26051 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26052 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26057 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26058 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26059 \begin_inset Formula
26061 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26069 \begin_layout Standard
26070 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26077 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26078 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26081 reference "eq:asquared"
26086 The other types are described in section
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26093 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26100 \begin_layout Section
26101 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26102 \begin_inset Index idx
26105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26106 Math ! Formula numbering
26112 \begin_inset Index idx
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 Math ! Referencing formulas
26122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26124 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26131 \begin_layout Standard
26132 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26134 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26135 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 \begin_inset space ~
26141 \begin_inset space ~
26149 arg "math-number-toggle"
26153 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26154 within parentheses.
26155 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26156 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26157 the document class.
26158 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26159 separated by a dot:
26160 \begin_inset Formula
26170 arg "math-number-toggle"
26173 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26174 You can only number displayed formulas.
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26178 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26180 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26181 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26183 \begin_inset space ~
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26195 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26198 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26199 \begin_inset Formula
26202 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26208 To number all lines use the shortcut
26211 arg "math-number-toggle"
26217 \begin_layout Standard
26218 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26221 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26222 A label is inserted with the menu
26224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26233 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26234 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26235 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26247 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26248 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26249 We inserted in the following example the label
26250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26257 in the second line:
26258 \begin_inset Formula
26260 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26261 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26266 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26267 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26268 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26272 \begin_inset space ~
26280 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26284 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26285 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26286 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26287 as the formula number:
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26291 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26294 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26301 \begin_layout Standard
26302 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26303 's cross-reference box are described in section
26304 \begin_inset space ~
26308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26310 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26315 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26323 \begin_layout Section
26324 User defined math macros
26325 \begin_inset Index idx
26328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 \begin_layout Standard
26339 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26340 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26341 Math macros are explained in section
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26356 \begin_layout Section
26360 \begin_layout Subsection
26362 \begin_inset Index idx
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26375 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26376 To set a font in a formula, use the
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26387 arg "math-insert \\font"
26390 , or enter its command, listed in table
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26397 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 \begin_inset Float table
26410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26411 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26416 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26420 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 \begin_inset Tabular
26431 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26432 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26433 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26434 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26493 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26520 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26641 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26668 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26727 \begin_layout Standard
26728 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26729 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26734 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26735 space when you need a space in the box.
26736 Here is an example where
26737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26748 denotes the set of numbers:
26749 \begin_inset Formula
26751 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26759 \begin_layout Standard
26760 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26761 You can, for example, put a character in
26770 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26774 \begin_inset Newline newline
26777 So it is better not to use this feature.
26780 \begin_layout Standard
26781 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26782 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26786 \begin_inset Newline newline
26789 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26795 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26796 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26809 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26812 \begin_layout Standard
26813 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26815 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26816 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26818 \begin_inset space ~
26826 \begin_layout Subsection
26828 \begin_inset Index idx
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26843 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26847 \begin_inset space ~
26851 \begin_inset space ~
26859 \begin_inset space ~
26867 arg "math-insert \\font"
26871 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26872 in black instead of blue.
26873 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26874 Here is an example:
26875 \begin_inset Formula
26878 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26879 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26888 \begin_layout Subsection
26890 \begin_inset Index idx
26893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26902 \begin_layout Standard
26903 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26904 automatically chosen in most situations.
26922 For most characters,
26930 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26931 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26936 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26937 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26938 thinks are appropriate.
26939 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26942 arg "math-insert \\style"
26946 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26947 For example, you can set
26948 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26951 , which is normally in
26960 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26964 The four styles are used in the following example:
26967 \begin_layout Standard
26968 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26972 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26976 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26980 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26986 \begin_layout Standard
26987 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26988 is set in a particular size with the menu
26990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26992 \begin_inset space ~
26997 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26998 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26999 will be adjusted to correspond.
27000 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27011 \begin_layout Standard
27015 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27021 \begin_layout Section
27022 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27024 \begin_inset Index idx
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_inset Index idx
27037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 \begin_layout Standard
27048 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27049 that are in common use.
27052 \begin_layout Subsection
27053 Enabling AMS-Support
27056 \begin_layout Standard
27057 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27058 the document by selecting the checkbox
27061 \begin_inset space ~
27065 \begin_inset space ~
27069 \begin_inset space ~
27076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27080 \begin_inset Index idx
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27084 Document ! Settings
27092 \begin_inset space ~
27098 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27099 -errors in formulas,
27100 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27103 \begin_layout Subsection
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27107 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27112 \begin_inset Index idx
27115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27124 \begin_layout Standard
27125 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27126 provides a selection of different formula types.
27128 allows you to choose between
27149 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27157 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27160 \begin_layout Chapter
27164 \begin_layout Section
27166 \begin_inset Index idx
27169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27178 name "sec:Cross-References"
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27187 's strengths is cross-references.
27188 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27190 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27191 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27192 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27195 \begin_layout Enumerate
27199 \begin_layout Enumerate
27200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27202 name "enu:Second-item"
27209 \begin_layout Enumerate
27213 \begin_layout Standard
27214 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27219 or by pressing the toolbar button
27226 A gray label box like this:
27227 \begin_inset Graphics
27228 filename clipart/label.png
27232 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27234 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27269 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27270 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27292 or the toolbar button
27295 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27299 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27300 \begin_inset Graphics
27301 filename clipart/reference.png
27305 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27307 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27320 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27324 \begin_layout Standard
27325 As an alternative to
27327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27330 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27335 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27336 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27338 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27351 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27352 \begin_inset space ~
27356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27358 reference "enu:Second-item"
27365 \begin_layout Standard
27366 It is recommended to use a protected space
27370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27371 described in section
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27378 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27387 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27388 line breaks between them.
27391 \begin_layout Standard
27392 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27395 \begin_layout Description
27396 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27399 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27406 \begin_layout Description
27407 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27408 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27420 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27427 \begin_layout Description
27428 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27429 \begin_inset space ~
27433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27434 LatexCommand pageref
27435 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27442 \begin_layout Description
27444 \begin_inset space ~
27448 \begin_inset space ~
27451 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27453 LatexCommand vpageref
27454 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27459 \begin_inset Newline newline
27462 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27463 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27464 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27465 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27466 it prints “on the next page”.
27467 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27470 \begin_layout Description
27472 \begin_inset space ~
27476 \begin_inset space ~
27480 \begin_inset space ~
27483 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27486 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27491 \begin_inset Newline newline
27494 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27500 ; otherwise it behaves like
27504 \begin_inset space ~
27508 \begin_inset space ~
27517 \begin_layout Description
27519 \begin_inset space ~
27522 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27523 \begin_inset Newline newline
27527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27545 \begin_inset Index idx
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27550 packages ! prettyref
27556 \begin_inset Index idx
27559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27561 packages ! refstyle
27572 \begin_inset Newline newline
27575 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27576 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27579 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27583 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27584 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27592 is the default and preferred because
27596 supports only English documents.
27597 The format is specified by using the command
27609 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27610 preamble of the document.
27611 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27629 \begin_inset Newline newline
27636 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27641 \begin_inset Newline newline
27652 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27653 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27655 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27656 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27661 , you might do so as follows:
27662 \begin_inset Newline newline
27669 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27674 \begin_inset Newline newline
27677 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27678 the package documentation
27679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27681 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27687 \begin_inset Newline newline
27698 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27705 \begin_layout Description
27707 \begin_inset space ~
27710 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27712 LatexCommand nameref
27713 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27720 \begin_layout Description
27722 \begin_inset space ~
27725 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27726 label for the reference:
27727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27728 LatexCommand labelonly
27729 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27734 \begin_inset Newline newline
27737 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27738 Code, if you want to issue a command
27739 that \SpecialChar LyX
27745 , then you may want to use the
27748 \begin_inset space ~
27753 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27763 This is the form needed for e.
27764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27768 \begin_inset space \space{}
27775 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27776 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27778 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27782 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 You can only use the style
27791 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27795 is always possible.
27798 \begin_layout Standard
27799 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27800 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27802 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27809 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27816 \begin_layout Standard
27817 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27821 \begin_inset space ~
27825 \begin_inset space ~
27830 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27831 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27834 \begin_inset space ~
27839 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27840 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27843 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27849 \begin_layout Standard
27850 You can change labels at any time.
27851 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27852 do not need to think about this.
27855 \begin_layout Standard
27856 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27858 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27863 References are described in detail in the section
27864 \begin_inset space ~
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27882 \begin_layout Section
27883 Table of Contents and other Listings
27884 \begin_inset Index idx
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27894 \begin_inset Index idx
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27898 Navigating ! Outline
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27923 \begin_layout Subsection
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27927 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27935 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27938 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27940 \begin_inset space ~
27944 \begin_inset space ~
27950 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27952 If you click on it, the
27956 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27957 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27958 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27960 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27962 \begin_inset space ~
27967 that is described in section
27968 \begin_inset space ~
27972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27974 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27981 \begin_layout Standard
27982 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27983 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27985 \begin_inset space ~
27989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27991 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27995 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28007 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28009 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28012 \begin_layout Subsection
28013 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28016 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28023 \begin_layout Standard
28024 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28026 You can insert them via the
28028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28032 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28035 \begin_layout Section
28036 URLs and Hyperlinks
28037 \begin_inset Index idx
28040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 \begin_inset Index idx
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28059 \begin_layout Subsection
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28070 \begin_layout Standard
28071 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28080 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28082 \begin_inset Flex URL
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28096 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28102 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28106 \begin_layout Standard
28107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28115 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28124 \begin_layout Subsection
28126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28128 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28135 \begin_layout Standard
28136 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28141 or with the toolbar button
28148 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28157 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28158 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28161 name "LyX's homepage"
28162 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28167 , an Email address like this:
28168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28170 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28177 , or a link to a file.
28180 \begin_layout Standard
28181 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28194 to the link target.
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28199 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28200 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28201 the text style dialog.
28202 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28208 name "LyX's homepage"
28209 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28217 \begin_layout Standard
28218 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28222 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28225 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28229 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28231 \begin_inset Newline newline
28239 \begin_inset Newline newline
28246 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28249 \begin_layout Section
28251 \begin_inset Index idx
28254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28263 name "sec:Appendices"
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 Appendices are created with the menu
28273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28275 \begin_inset space ~
28279 \begin_inset space ~
28285 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28286 as the appendix part of the book.
28287 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28291 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28292 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28293 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28294 and the subsection number.
28295 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28301 \begin_inset space ~
28305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28307 reference "chap:Credits"
28312 \begin_inset space ~
28316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28318 reference "subsec:Export"
28325 \begin_layout Section
28327 \begin_inset Index idx
28330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28339 name "sec:Bibliography"
28346 \begin_layout Standard
28347 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28349 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28350 \begin_inset space ~
28354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28356 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28363 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28368 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28369 \begin_inset space ~
28373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28375 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28380 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28381 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28382 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28386 using a bibliography database.
28389 \begin_layout Standard
28390 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28391 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28395 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28396 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28397 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28398 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28399 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28402 \begin_layout Subsection
28403 The Bibliography Environment
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28406 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28418 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28420 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28429 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28431 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28432 of ASCII characters only.
28436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28438 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28441 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28447 \begin_inset Newline newline
28451 \begin_inset Flex URL
28454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28456 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28468 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28478 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28481 \begin_layout Standard
28482 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28487 or the toolbar button
28490 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28494 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28495 containing the available citations.
28496 Select one or more keys from the list and
28506 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28507 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28511 \begin_layout Standard
28512 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28513 entry with surrounding brackets.
28518 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28519 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28535 Companion Second Edition
28538 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28540 key "latexcompanion"
28548 \begin_layout Standard
28549 The \SpecialChar LyX
28550 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28569 \begin_inset Index idx
28572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28580 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28592 Author A and Author B(Year)
28593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28600 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28602 Then, if you select
28605 \begin_inset space ~
28610 in the document settings
28611 \begin_inset Index idx
28614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 Document ! Settings
28622 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28624 \begin_inset space ~
28630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28632 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28639 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28643 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28648 \begin_inset space ~
28656 arg "layout-paragraph"
28660 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28663 \begin_layout Subsection
28664 Bibliography databases
28665 \begin_inset Index idx
28668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28669 Bibliography ! Databases
28675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28677 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28684 \begin_layout Standard
28685 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28693 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28694 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28699 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28701 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28702 your working field in a database.
28703 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28704 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28705 list for that document.
28706 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 The database is a text file with the file extension
28712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28723 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28724 The format is explained in
28725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28732 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28734 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28736 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28742 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28743 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28744 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28746 \begin_inset Flex URL
28749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28761 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28762 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28763 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28765 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28767 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28768 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28769 Those are addressed by
28774 \begin_inset Index idx
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28779 packages ! biblatex
28785 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28786 (although it has been significantly
28787 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28798 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28799 might conversely fail to correctly
28800 handle databases that use specific
28809 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28814 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28819 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28825 \begin_inset Index idx
28828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28829 Document ! Settings
28841 \begin_inset space ~
28846 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28855 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28857 \begin_inset Index idx
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28870 \begin_layout Standard
28871 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28879 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28881 \begin_inset space ~
28887 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28888 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28896 Add bibliography to TOC
28898 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28903 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28904 in the document or just the cited references.
28907 \begin_layout Standard
28908 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28909 style file is a text file with the file extension
28910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28921 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28922 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28923 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28924 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28926 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28932 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28933 \begin_inset Newline newline
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28939 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28949 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28954 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28958 \begin_layout Standard
28959 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28964 \begin_inset Index idx
28967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28968 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28974 \begin_inset Index idx
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28979 packages ! biblatex
28987 \begin_layout Standard
28988 Accessing a database via
28992 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29000 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29002 \begin_inset space ~
29008 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29009 you cannot select a
29014 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29018 \begin_layout Standard
29023 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29036 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29037 file (text file with the file extension
29038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29049 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29050 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29052 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29056 \begin_layout Standard
29061 styles are not set in the
29064 \begin_inset space ~
29069 dialog, but in the document settings.
29070 \begin_inset Index idx
29073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29074 Document ! Settings
29079 However, in the dialog in the
29083 field, which is only visible if you use
29087 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29088 example how its heading will appear).
29089 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29094 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29105 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29106 \begin_inset space ~
29110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29112 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29123 Bibliography Processors
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29128 uses a bibliography processor,
29129 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29130 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29131 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29133 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29134 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29140 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29141 You can do this on a general level in
29143 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29144 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29145 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29148 or for individual documents in
29150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29151 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29155 The following variants are available by default:
29158 \begin_layout Description
29159 biber a specific, modern processor
29160 \begin_inset Index idx
29163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29170 developed exclusively for
29174 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29180 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29185 makes use of; if you use the
29189 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29196 \begin_layout Description
29197 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29198 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29199 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29203 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29206 \begin_layout Description
29207 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29208 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29212 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29216 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29220 features are supported.
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 By default (with the
29230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29231 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29244 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29245 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29246 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29249 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29250 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29263 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29264 -based bibliography styles).
29265 This should suit most needs.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29270 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29271 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29276 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29277 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29278 You can adjust it in
29280 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29281 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29282 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 \begin_layout Standard
29289 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29290 can add below the selection.
29291 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29292 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29314 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29316 These are explained in detail in section
29318 Customizing Bibliographies
29322 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29327 Additional Features
29332 \begin_layout Subsection
29334 \begin_inset Index idx
29337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29338 Bibliography ! Citation format
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29346 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29359 \begin_inset space \space{}
29362 numerical citation (as
29363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29370 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29378 ) or author-year citations (as
29379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29388 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29392 \begin_layout Standard
29393 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29401 \begin_inset Index idx
29404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29405 Document ! Settings
29410 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29416 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29417 labels, is there to use
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29431 \begin_inset space ~
29436 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29439 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 With a bibliography database (see
29448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29450 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29457 ) one has in contrary to the
29461 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29462 These style formats are available:
29465 \begin_layout Description
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29470 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29471 -based approached without any additional packages
29472 (simple numeric citations).
29475 \begin_layout Description
29476 Biblatex loads the package
29481 \begin_inset Index idx
29484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29486 packages ! biblatex
29491 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29493 Biblatex citation style
29497 Biblatex bibliography style
29500 Options to the package
29504 can be entered in the
29511 \begin_layout Description
29513 \begin_inset space ~
29517 \begin_inset space ~
29520 mode) loads the package
29524 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29525 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29537 behavior very closely.
29542 this option has some additional styles.
29547 styles are also supported by this variant.
29550 \begin_layout Description
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29555 (BibTeX) loads the package
29560 \begin_inset Index idx
29563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29570 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29573 \begin_layout Description
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29578 (BibTeX) loads the package
29583 \begin_inset Index idx
29586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29593 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29596 \begin_layout Standard
29605 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29607 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29616 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29618 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29619 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29621 Biblatex citation style
29624 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29630 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29636 are available in the
29641 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29642 a name prefix such as
29643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29658 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29663 \begin_inset space \space{}
29667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29678 \begin_layout Standard
29679 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29685 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29700 Here is a simple example where the text
29701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29705 \begin_inset space ~
29709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29712 appears after the reference:
29715 \begin_layout Quote
29717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29720 key "latexcompanion"
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 All styles except for
29733 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29743 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29748 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29749 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29750 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29755 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29756 multi-citation (so-called
29757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29760 qualified citation lists
29761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29767 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29772 dialog will display three columns in the field
29779 \begin_inset space ~
29787 \begin_inset space ~
29795 \begin_inset space ~
29801 If you double-click on an item's
29804 \begin_inset space ~
29812 \begin_inset space ~
29817 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29820 General text before
29826 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29829 \begin_layout Section
29831 \begin_inset Index idx
29834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29850 \begin_layout Standard
29851 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29855 \begin_inset space ~
29860 or the toolbar button
29867 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29868 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29869 by \SpecialChar LyX
29870 as the index entry.
29873 \begin_layout Standard
29874 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29877 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29879 \begin_inset space ~
29885 A light blue box labeled
29886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29897 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29898 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29903 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29904 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29905 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29906 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29908 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29910 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29918 \begin_layout Subsection
29919 Grouping Index Entries
29920 \begin_inset Index idx
29923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29935 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29936 lists under the entry
29937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29945 First we create the entry
29946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29954 \begin_inset space ~
29958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29960 reference "subsec:Lists"
29965 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29972 reference "sec:Itemize"
29976 , we insert the command
29979 \begin_layout Standard
29985 \begin_layout Standard
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 for the enumerated list in section
29997 \begin_inset space ~
30001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30003 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 The exclamation mark
30012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 marks the grouping levels.
30020 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30021 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30022 If we don't have an index entry for
30023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30030 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30033 \begin_layout Subsection
30035 \begin_inset Index idx
30038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30039 Index ! Page ranges
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30048 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30050 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30051 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30052 an index entry in section
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30059 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30069 Paragraph environments|(
30072 \begin_layout Standard
30073 and another entry at the end of section
30074 \begin_inset space ~
30078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30080 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30087 \begin_layout Standard
30090 Paragraph environments|)
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30118 respectively start and end the index range.
30119 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30120 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30121 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30122 An example is the index entry
30123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30126 Document ! Settings
30127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30133 \begin_layout Subsection
30135 \begin_inset Index idx
30138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30139 Index ! Cross referencing
30147 \begin_layout Standard
30148 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30149 We referred for example in the index entry
30150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30158 \begin_inset space ~
30162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30164 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30168 ) to the index entry
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30176 in the same section using the entry
30179 \begin_layout Standard
30182 GIF|see{Image formats}
30185 \begin_layout Standard
30186 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30188 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30189 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30192 \begin_layout Subsection
30194 \begin_inset Index idx
30197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30198 Index ! Entry order
30206 \begin_layout Standard
30207 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30208 follow the rules for the index order.
30209 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30215 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30217 \begin_inset space ~
30221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30223 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30232 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30233 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 \begin_inset Index idx
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 Dummy entries ! maïs
30268 \begin_inset Index idx
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30272 Dummy entries ! maître
30278 \begin_inset Index idx
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30282 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30287 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30288 maïs, maison, maître.
30289 To achieve this, we use the command
30292 \begin_layout Standard
30295 previous entry@current entry
30298 \begin_layout Standard
30299 In our case we want to have
30300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30315 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30318 \begin_layout Standard
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30325 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30326 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30328 See the next subsection for an example.
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30339 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30344 to generate the index (see section
30345 \begin_inset space ~
30349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30351 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30360 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30361 -package aeguill in section
30362 \begin_inset space ~
30366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30368 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30372 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30373 -packages although all these index
30374 commands start with
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30388 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30393 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30396 \begin_layout Standard
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30420 \begin_layout Subsection
30422 \begin_inset Index idx
30425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30426 Index ! Entry layout
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30435 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30436 \begin_inset Index idx
30439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 This is an italic dummy entry
30447 You can also format the page number using the character
30448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30455 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30456 -command without a backslash.
30457 We can write for example
30460 \begin_layout Standard
30463 italic page number:|textit
30466 \begin_layout Standard
30467 to get the page number in italic.
30468 \begin_inset Index idx
30471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30472 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30477 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30478 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30496 \begin_inset space ~
30502 Have a look at section
30503 \begin_inset space ~
30507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30509 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30513 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30517 \begin_layout Standard
30518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30526 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30530 to generate the index, see section
30531 \begin_inset space ~
30535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30537 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30546 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30551 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30552 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30555 key "latexcompanion"
30568 \begin_layout Standard
30569 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30571 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30572 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30573 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30574 If so, put the following in the preamble
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30593 \begin_layout Standard
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 in the index entry.
30601 \begin_inset Index idx
30604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30605 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30610 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30611 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30612 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30616 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30617 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30618 a bold font for all index entries.
30619 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30631 documentation for details,
30632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30634 key "makeindex,xindy"
30642 \begin_layout Subsection
30644 \begin_inset Index idx
30647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30656 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30663 \begin_layout Standard
30664 If the index generation program
30668 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30669 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30673 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30674 distribution, is used.
30678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30684 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30685 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30686 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30687 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30697 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30699 dialog, see section
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30706 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30711 The available options are listed and explained in
30712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30714 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30720 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30726 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30734 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30735 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30738 \begin_layout Subsection
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30744 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30752 next to the standard index.
30754 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30755 that add this feature.
30762 \begin_inset Index idx
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 packages ! splitidx
30772 package to generate multiple indexes.
30773 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30779 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30789 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30790 style, but it also includes
30791 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30792 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30801 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30802 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30808 and select the option
30810 Use multiple Indexes
30817 already contains the standard index
30818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30826 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30827 also appear as a heading) to the
30831 input field and press the
30836 The new index now also appears in the list.
30837 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30838 label color to the new index.
30841 \begin_layout Standard
30842 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30852 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30853 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30854 are additional features:
30857 \begin_layout Itemize
30858 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30859 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30862 \begin_layout Itemize
30863 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30864 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30872 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30873 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30874 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30875 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30878 \begin_layout Section
30879 Nomenclature/Glossary
30880 \begin_inset Index idx
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30890 \begin_inset Index idx
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30924 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30932 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30933 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30934 called nomenclature or glossary.
30937 \begin_layout Standard
30938 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30945 \begin_inset Index idx
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30965 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30970 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30971 and then use the menu
30973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30979 \begin_inset space ~
30984 or the toolbar button
30987 arg "nomencl-insert"
30992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31003 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31006 \begin_layout Standard
31007 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31008 The first is the term or
31012 that you wish to define.
31017 of the term or symbol.
31020 \begin_layout Standard
31021 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31030 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31038 \begin_layout Subsection
31039 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31040 \begin_inset Index idx
31043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 Nomenclature ! Layout
31052 \begin_layout Standard
31053 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31057 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31064 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31072 \begin_inset Newline newline
31080 \begin_inset Newline newline
31086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31093 character starts/ends the formula.
31094 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31095 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31107 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31117 \begin_layout Standard
31118 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31119 -syntax is given in section
31120 \begin_inset space ~
31124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31126 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31133 \begin_layout Standard
31137 \begin_inset space ~
31142 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31144 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31149 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31156 in this document is:
31157 \begin_inset Newline newline
31162 dummy entry for the character
31167 \begin_inset Newline newline
31179 \begin_inset space ~
31189 font use the command
31218 \begin_layout Standard
31219 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31224 \begin_inset space \space{}
31228 \begin_inset Newline newline
31244 \begin_inset Newline newline
31247 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31248 This command will make the font of all symbols
31255 \begin_inset space ~
31263 \begin_layout Standard
31264 If the characters |
31265 \begin_inset space \space{}
31269 \begin_inset space \space{}
31273 \begin_inset space \space{}
31277 \begin_inset space \space{}
31281 \begin_inset space \space{}
31284 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31285 a quote character in front of them.
31286 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31287 LatexCommand nomenclature
31288 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31289 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31297 \begin_layout Subsection
31298 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31299 \begin_inset Index idx
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31303 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31311 \begin_layout Standard
31312 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31313 -code of the symbol
31315 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31317 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31320 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31321 LatexCommand nomenclature
31323 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31331 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31335 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31336 LatexCommand nomenclature
31339 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31345 They will be sorted by
31346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31372 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31375 will be sorted before the
31379 since the character
31380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31387 is considered in sorting.
31390 \begin_layout Standard
31391 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31394 \begin_inset space ~
31399 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31400 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31402 For the example given, you can insert
31406 in this field for the
31407 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31414 will be located before
31415 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31422 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31437 \begin_layout Subsection
31438 Nomenclature Options
31439 \begin_inset Index idx
31442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 Nomenclature ! Options
31451 \begin_layout Standard
31456 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31457 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31460 \begin_layout Description
31461 refeq Appends the phrase
31462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31477 to every nomenclature entry, where
31483 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31486 \begin_layout Description
31487 refpage Appends the phrase
31488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31503 to every nomenclature entry, where
31509 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31512 \begin_layout Description
31513 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31516 \begin_layout Standard
31517 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31518 class options list in the
31520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31524 In this document the options
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31540 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31545 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31548 \begin_layout Description
31558 \begin_layout Description
31561 nomrefpage Like the
31568 \begin_layout Description
31571 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31580 \begin_layout Description
31584 \begin_inset space ~
31590 \begin_inset space ~
31595 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31598 \begin_layout Standard
31600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31607 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31608 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31620 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31623 \begin_inset Newline newline
31630 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31635 \begin_inset Newline newline
31639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31654 by their translation.
31657 \begin_layout Subsection
31658 Printing the Nomenclature
31659 \begin_inset Index idx
31662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31663 Nomenclature ! Printing
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31675 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31691 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31692 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31693 You can choose between these settings:
31696 \begin_layout Description
31697 Default a space of 1
31698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31704 \begin_layout Description
31706 \begin_inset space ~
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31713 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31716 \begin_layout Description
31717 Custom custom space
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31721 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31730 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31738 For example, in order to change the name to
31742 , add the following line to the preamble:
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31753 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31756 \begin_layout Subsection
31757 Nomenclature Program
31758 \begin_inset Index idx
31761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31762 Nomenclature ! Program
31768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31770 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31777 \begin_layout Standard
31783 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31784 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31786 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31791 by adding options, see section
31792 \begin_inset space ~
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31798 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31803 The available options are listed and explained in
31804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31806 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31814 \begin_layout Section
31816 \begin_inset Index idx
31819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31826 \begin_inset Index idx
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31830 Document ! Branches
31836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31838 name "sec:Branches"
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31847 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31848 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31849 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31852 \begin_layout Standard
31853 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31854 allows you to put text into branches.
31855 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31856 To create a branch, either select the menu
31858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31859 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31862 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31871 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31872 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31873 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31874 and whether the name of the branch should
31875 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31876 (see below for an example).
31877 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31878 to the name of the other) and to add
31879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31891 \begin_inset space ~
31894 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31895 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31898 \begin_layout Standard
31899 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31900 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31905 where you can choose a branch.
31906 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31910 \begin_layout Standard
31911 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31912 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31915 \begin_layout Standard
31916 \begin_inset Branch Question
31920 \begin_layout Standard
31925 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31933 \begin_layout Standard
31934 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31938 \begin_layout Standard
31943 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31962 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31963 Consider for example a file
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31971 which has the above branches.
31973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31980 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32004 branch were inactive,
32005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32020 branch was active, likewise
32021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32036 branch was active, and
32037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32040 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32044 if both branches were active.
32045 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32046 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32059 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32060 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32064 \begin_inset space ~
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32073 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32090 branch is deactivated.
32096 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32103 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32104 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32105 definitions for each branch.
32106 For example you can define for the question branch
32110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32111 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 -syntax, see section
32113 \begin_inset space ~
32117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32119 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32131 \begin_layout Standard
32141 \begin_layout Standard
32151 \begin_layout Standard
32152 and for the answer branch
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32176 \begin_inset Branch Question
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32250 Now it is possible to use the
32254 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32261 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32264 commands to obtain conditional output.
32265 Here is an example formula where only the
32272 \begin_inset Formula
32274 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32298 \begin_inset space \space{}
32301 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32303 For this advanced usage, see the
32309 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32314 \begin_layout Section
32316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32318 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32323 \begin_inset Index idx
32326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32335 \begin_layout Standard
32338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32342 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32344 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32350 \begin_inset Index idx
32353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32355 packages ! hyperref
32360 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32361 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32362 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32363 part of the document.
32367 \begin_layout Standard
32368 The header information in the dialog tab
32372 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32373 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32374 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32375 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32379 \begin_inset space ~
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32388 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32389 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32390 and author entries.
32394 \begin_inset space ~
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32402 \begin_inset space ~
32407 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32410 \begin_layout Standard
32411 You can specify in the dialog tab
32415 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32420 \begin_inset space ~
32424 \begin_inset space ~
32428 \begin_inset space ~
32433 option allows long links to be split;
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32444 \begin_inset space ~
32452 \begin_inset space ~
32457 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32460 \begin_inset space ~
32465 colors the different links.
32466 The default colors are:
32469 \begin_layout Labeling
32470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32475 for hyperlinks and URLs
32478 \begin_layout Labeling
32479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32487 \begin_layout Labeling
32488 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32496 \begin_layout Standard
32497 but you can change these in the field
32502 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32505 \begin_layout Standard
32508 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32511 \begin_layout Standard
32516 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32517 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32518 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32526 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32527 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32528 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32538 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32539 when opening the PDF.
32541 \begin_inset space ~
32544 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32545 \begin_inset space ~
32548 1 will only display the sections.
32551 \begin_layout Standard
32552 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32553 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32559 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32570 \begin_layout Section
32572 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32576 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32583 \begin_layout Subsection
32586 \begin_inset Index idx
32589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32599 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 As \SpecialChar LyX
32608 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32609 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32610 commands and constructs,
32613 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32614 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32615 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32616 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32618 cannot support all packages and
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32623 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32624 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32625 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32629 Code box is created by the menu
32631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32638 or by the toolbar button
32651 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32660 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32662 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32664 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32669 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32674 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32681 , you can write the command part
32687 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32688 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32692 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32693 Code box behind the word.
32694 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32695 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32700 \begin_inset Graphics
32701 filename clipart/ERT.png
32709 \begin_layout Standard
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32714 This is a line with a
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32741 \begin_layout Standard
32742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32750 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32751 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32752 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 know that the command is finished.
32761 \begin_layout Subsection
32762 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32764 \begin_inset Argument 1
32767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32768 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32775 \begin_inset Index idx
32778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32788 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32795 \begin_layout Standard
32796 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32797 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32798 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32799 uses in the background.
32800 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32801 is based on commands, you can
32802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32811 any time if you know the right commands.
32812 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32813 is the end of the day.
32814 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32815 all caption labels bold.
32816 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32818 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32825 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32827 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32830 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 As result you find that the package
32846 \begin_inset Index idx
32849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32857 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32862 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32879 usepackage[options]{package name}
32882 \begin_layout Standard
32883 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32884 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32885 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32886 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32890 In your case the package name is
32895 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32900 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32901 So you add the command
32904 \begin_layout Standard
32909 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32918 For more commands provided by the
32922 package, have a look at its documentation,
32923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32938 \begin_layout Standard
32939 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32941 For example if you use a
32945 class, you don't need the package
32949 , you can instead write
32952 \begin_layout Standard
32957 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32964 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32965 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32972 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32975 \begin_layout Standard
32976 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32977 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32979 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32980 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32981 Code box as described in the previous
32985 \begin_layout Standard
32986 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32987 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32990 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32992 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33001 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33007 \begin_layout Standard
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33021 \begin_inset Note Note
33024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33025 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33033 \begin_layout Left Header
33034 \begin_inset Argument 1
33037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33057 \begin_inset Note Note
33060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 defines the header line as described below
33069 \begin_layout Center Header
33070 \begin_inset Argument 1
33073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 \begin_layout Right Header
33083 \begin_inset Argument 1
33086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 \begin_layout Left Footer
33108 \begin_inset Argument 1
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33132 \begin_layout Center Footer
33133 \begin_inset Argument 1
33136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33148 \begin_inset Newline newline
33152 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33158 \begin_layout Right Footer
33159 \begin_inset Argument 1
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33184 \begin_layout Section
33185 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33188 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33193 \begin_inset Index idx
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33197 Document ! Header/Footer line
33203 \begin_inset Index idx
33206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33216 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33220 \begin_inset space ~
33231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33237 \begin_inset space ~
33243 As a second step add in the menu
33245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33246 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33255 Custom Header/Footerlines
33258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33262 This module offers the following 6
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33269 \begin_layout Description
33271 \begin_inset space ~
33275 \begin_inset space ~
33279 \begin_inset space ~
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33287 \begin_inset space ~
33293 \begin_layout Description
33295 \begin_inset space ~
33299 \begin_inset space ~
33303 \begin_inset space ~
33307 \begin_inset space ~
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33318 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33319 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33323 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33324 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33326 \begin_inset space ~
33330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33332 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33336 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33339 \begin_layout Standard
33340 \begin_inset Float figure
33346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 \begin_inset Tabular
33350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33352 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33354 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33356 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33414 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 The normal text on the page goes here.
33419 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33421 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33422 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33427 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33465 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33494 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33517 name "fig:Page-layout"
33521 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33543 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33547 \begin_inset space ~
33552 is set to “Default”.
33553 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33562 \begin_layout Subsection
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33567 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33568 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33569 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33570 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33572 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33574 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33577 \begin_layout Standard
33578 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33579 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33585 \begin_inset space ~
33593 \begin_layout Description
33596 thepage prints the current page number
33599 \begin_layout Description
33602 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33605 \begin_layout Description
33608 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33611 \begin_layout Description
33614 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33615 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33622 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33625 because it usually goes in a left header.
33628 \begin_layout Description
33631 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33632 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33634 It is normally used in the right header.
33637 \begin_layout Subsection
33638 Default header/footer
33641 \begin_layout Standard
33642 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33643 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33644 footer has the page number.
33645 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33646 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33647 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33650 \begin_inset space ~
33658 \begin_layout Subsection
33662 \begin_layout Standard
33663 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33664 Some pages are different.
33665 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33666 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33667 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33668 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33669 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33673 Header and footer decoration line
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33677 By default, you get a 0.4
33678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33681 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33682 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33694 in the following way:
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33704 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33721 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33731 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33736 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33747 Several header/footer lines
33750 \begin_layout Standard
33751 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33752 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33753 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33755 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33781 \begin_layout Standard
33788 headheight}{height}
33791 \begin_layout Standard
33796 is a size in standard units (e.
33797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33801 \begin_inset space \space{}
33809 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33810 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33811 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33812 logfile with the menu
33814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33816 \begin_inset space ~
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33829 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33834 \begin_inset Index idx
33837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33839 packages ! fancyhdr
33845 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33846 for your header/footer.
33849 \begin_layout Subsection
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33854 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33855 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33856 This example consists of the following definition:
33859 \begin_layout Description
33861 \begin_inset space ~
33870 , empty optional argument
33873 \begin_layout Description
33875 \begin_inset space ~
33878 Header empty, empty optional argument
33881 \begin_layout Description
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33892 in the optional argument
33895 \begin_layout Description
33897 \begin_inset space ~
33906 in the optional argument
33909 \begin_layout Description
33911 \begin_inset space ~
33924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33928 \begin_inset Newline newline
33932 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33939 in the optional argument
33942 \begin_layout Description
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33953 , empty optional argument
33956 \begin_layout Description
33959 headrulewidth set to 2
33960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33966 \begin_layout Standard
33967 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33968 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33974 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33984 \begin_layout Standard
33985 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33999 pagestyle{headings}
34005 \begin_inset Note Note
34008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34009 switches back to page style with the default headings
34017 \begin_layout Section
34018 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34021 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34026 \begin_inset Index idx
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 \begin_inset Index idx
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34050 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34051 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34052 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34055 \begin_layout Subsection
34059 \begin_layout Standard
34060 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34066 \begin_inset Index idx
34069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 packages ! preview-latex
34076 (on some systems named simply
34081 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34090 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34092 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34100 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34101 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34102 -package are automatically
34103 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34107 \begin_layout Subsection
34111 \begin_layout Standard
34112 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34113 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34115 activate the option
34118 \begin_inset space ~
34125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34131 \begin_inset space ~
34135 \begin_inset space ~
34138 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34145 \begin_inset space ~
34158 \begin_inset space ~
34163 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34172 \begin_inset space ~
34180 \begin_inset space ~
34188 \begin_layout Standard
34189 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34190 and when you finish
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34203 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34204 generated by activating the option
34207 \begin_inset space ~
34213 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34221 \begin_layout Subsection
34222 Selected document parts
34225 \begin_layout Standard
34226 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34227 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34228 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34229 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34231 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34237 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34238 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34239 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34242 \begin_layout Standard
34243 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34250 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 is explained in section
34264 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34269 \begin_inset space ~
34279 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34280 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34281 the final rotated boxes,
34282 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34283 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34285 Here is the result:
34288 \begin_layout Standard
34289 \begin_inset Preview
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34300 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34306 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34316 height_special "totalheight"
34321 backgroundcolor "none"
34324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34349 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34355 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 Previewing works also for colors.
34379 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34398 is explained in section
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34419 \begin_inset Preview
34421 \begin_layout Standard
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34449 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 If \SpecialChar LyX
34477 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34478 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34479 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34480 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34482 the \SpecialChar TeX
34484 If \SpecialChar LyX
34485 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34486 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34488 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34489 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34490 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34493 \begin_layout Subsection
34498 \begin_layout Standard
34499 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34500 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34503 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34505 \begin_inset space ~
34510 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34512 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34514 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34515 's main window, then only this selection
34516 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34517 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34518 the source view window.
34523 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34524 ; but note that if you have
34525 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34527 not just the one which is open at the time.
34530 \begin_layout Section
34531 Advanced Find and Replace
34532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34534 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34539 \begin_inset Index idx
34542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 \begin_inset Index idx
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34561 \begin_layout Subsection
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34566 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34567 allows for searching of complex,
34568 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34570 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34571 The key-features are:
34574 \begin_layout Itemize
34575 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34576 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34577 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34581 \begin_layout Itemize
34582 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34583 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34584 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34585 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34588 \begin_layout Itemize
34589 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34590 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34591 outside of mathematics environments
34594 \begin_layout Itemize
34595 Search may be widened to a specific
34600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34604 \begin_inset space ~
34607 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34608 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34615 \begin_layout Itemize
34616 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34617 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34622 \begin_inset space ~
34625 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34628 \begin_layout Subsection
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34648 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34651 ) or the toolbar button
34654 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34660 Advanced Find and Replace
34665 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34669 \begin_layout Standard
34675 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34679 \begin_inset space ~
34684 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34687 arg "paragraph-break"
34691 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34692 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34696 arg "paragraph-break"
34699 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34703 searches backwards.
34706 \begin_layout Standard
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34715 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34729 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34733 Searching for mathematics
34736 \begin_layout Standard
34737 Mathematical formulas, such as
34738 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34741 or something more complex like
34742 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34745 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34750 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34751 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34752 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34753 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34763 \begin_layout Standard
34764 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34765 This is done by switching to the
34769 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34774 This way, entering in the
34781 \begin_layout Itemize
34782 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34783 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34786 \begin_layout Itemize
34787 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34788 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34791 \begin_layout Itemize
34792 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34793 of it only within section headings.
34794 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34795 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34799 \begin_layout Itemize
34800 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34801 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34808 \begin_layout Standard
34809 The entries made in the
34813 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34822 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34826 button or alternatively press
34829 arg "paragraph-break"
34836 while the cursor is in the
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34848 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34850 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34854 \begin_layout Itemize
34855 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34856 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34864 with its typewriter version
34865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34879 \begin_layout Itemize
34880 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34886 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34898 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34905 (you may want to enable the
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34921 options and disable the
34929 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34937 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34938 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34942 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34945 , or occurrences of
34946 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34950 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34956 \begin_layout Subsection
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34966 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34970 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34980 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34986 This is done with the context menu
34988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34989 Insert Regular Expression
34991 while the cursor is in the
34996 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34997 expression matching rules
35001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35002 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35012 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35013 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35019 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35020 same text in the document.
35021 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35022 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35025 \begin_layout Enumerate
35026 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35031 editor the fraction
35032 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35036 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35039 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35040 fractions with the given denominator.
35043 \begin_layout Enumerate
35044 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35056 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35061 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35062 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35063 Also, by inserting a
35064 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35067 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35068 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35073 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35074 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35077 , and referring back to them through
35078 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35082 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35086 For example, try searching with the regexp
35087 \begin_inset Newline newline
35090 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35093 \begin_inset Newline newline
35096 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35099 \begin_layout Standard
35100 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35112 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35113 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35114 sub-expressions is absolute.
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35120 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35123 always refers to the first occurrence of
35124 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35127 in all entered regexps.
35135 \begin_layout Section
35137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35139 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35144 \begin_inset Index idx
35147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 \begin_layout Standard
35158 has a built-in spell checker.
35161 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35168 key or the toolbar button
35171 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35174 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35175 beginning of the currently selected text.
35176 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35177 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35178 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35179 scrolled so that it is visible.
35180 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35181 n, if any could be found.
35182 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35186 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35187 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35190 \begin_layout Standard
35191 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35198 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35199 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35201 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35202 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35213 arg "dialog-show character"
35216 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35218 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35221 \begin_layout Standard
35222 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35223 can be downloaded from here:
35224 \begin_inset Newline newline
35228 \begin_inset Flex URL
35231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35239 \begin_inset Newline newline
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35246 files for each language.
35247 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35251 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35252 's installation subfolder
35260 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35262 \begin_inset Newline newline
35265 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35266 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35267 but in most cases these are
35283 is the language code.
35286 \begin_layout Subsection
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35294 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35302 you can set the following things:
35305 \begin_layout Description
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35310 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35311 should use for spell checking.
35312 Depending on your platform,
35326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35327 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35328 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35343 \begin_inset space ~
35346 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35349 \begin_layout Description
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35354 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35355 will always use the given language
35356 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35359 \begin_layout Description
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35364 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35370 \begin_inset space \space{}
35374 This should normally not be needed.
35377 \begin_layout Description
35379 \begin_inset space ~
35383 \begin_inset space ~
35386 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35398 \begin_layout Description
35400 \begin_inset space ~
35403 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35404 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35405 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35406 appear in a context menu.
35407 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35411 \begin_layout Description
35413 \begin_inset space ~
35417 \begin_inset space ~
35421 \begin_inset space ~
35424 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35428 \begin_layout Section
35430 \begin_inset Index idx
35433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35442 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35449 \begin_layout Standard
35451 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35452 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35462 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35464 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35474 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35476 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35477 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35478 which are available for many languages.
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35483 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35487 \begin_layout Subsection
35488 Setting up the thesaurus
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35500 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35504 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35509 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35523 For instance, the US English files are named:
35526 \begin_layout Itemize
35530 \begin_layout Itemize
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35543 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35544 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35547 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35548 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35549 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35556 ) to the path where they are installed.
35560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35561 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35562 ies, typical locations are
35568 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35572 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35576 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35579 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35585 LibreOffice-<Version>
35592 On the Mac, the default location is
35594 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35595 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35596 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35597 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35598 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35599 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35607 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35608 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35609 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35614 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35615 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35619 \begin_layout Itemize
35620 \begin_inset Flex URL
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35625 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35633 \begin_layout Standard
35634 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35635 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35637 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35638 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35639 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35646 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35648 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35649 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35654 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35656 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35659 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35665 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35668 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35669 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35678 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35679 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35686 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35689 \begin_layout Subsection
35690 Using the thesaurus
35693 \begin_layout Standard
35694 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35696 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35699 or the toolbar button
35702 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35705 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35707 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35709 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35710 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35711 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35720 ), related terms (such as
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35732 ), compounds (such as
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35744 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35753 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35756 \begin_layout Standard
35757 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35758 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35762 \begin_layout Standard
35763 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35764 the dictionary, such as the above
35768 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35773 \begin_inset space \space{}
35776 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35777 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35778 For example, looking up the word form
35782 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35787 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35792 \begin_inset space \space{}
35803 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35804 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35805 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35808 \begin_layout Section
35810 \begin_inset Index idx
35813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35820 \begin_inset Index idx
35823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35824 Document ! Change Tracking
35830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35832 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35839 \begin_layout Standard
35840 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35841 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35842 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35843 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35847 \begin_inset space ~
35850 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35875 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35876 You can change the color in
35878 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35879 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35885 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35896 \begin_inset Index idx
35899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35900 Color ! Change tracking
35905 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35906 's status bar when the
35907 cursor is in changed text.
35908 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35911 arg "changes-merge"
35917 \begin_layout Standard
35918 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35920 \begin_inset Index idx
35923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35933 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 \begin_inset Graphics
35941 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35949 \begin_layout Standard
35950 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35960 \begin_layout Standard
35961 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35968 \begin_inset Tabular
35969 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35970 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35971 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35972 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35982 arg "changes-track"
35990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36001 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36021 arg "changes-output"
36029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36035 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36040 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36080 Jumps to the next change
36086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36095 arg "change-accept"
36103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36114 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36134 arg "change-reject"
36142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36153 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36173 arg "changes-merge"
36181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36192 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36212 arg "all-changes-accept"
36220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36231 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36237 \begin_inset space ~
36246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 arg "all-changes-reject"
36263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36274 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36313 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36315 \begin_inset space ~
36324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36347 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36372 \begin_layout Standard
36373 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36393 \begin_layout Standard
36394 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36395 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36396 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36397 the next change after the current cursor position.
36398 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36399 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36400 step to the next change.
36401 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36405 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36406 to describe a change.
36409 \begin_layout Standard
36410 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36416 \begin_inset Index idx
36419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36427 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36436 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36440 \begin_layout Section
36441 Comparison of Documents
36442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36444 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36449 \begin_inset Index idx
36452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36453 Comparison of documents
36461 \begin_layout Standard
36462 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36465 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36469 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36470 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36472 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36474 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36520 enables the change tracking option
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36531 \begin_inset space ~
36536 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36539 \begin_layout Section
36540 International Support
36541 \begin_inset Index idx
36544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36545 International support
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36555 with any language you want.
36556 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36557 up \SpecialChar LyX
36559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36561 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36570 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36571 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36578 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36585 \begin_layout Subsection
36587 \begin_inset Index idx
36590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36597 \begin_inset Index idx
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36601 Document ! Settings
36607 \begin_inset Index idx
36610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36611 Document ! Language
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36626 dialog lets you set
36628 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36633 \begin_layout Standard
36638 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36648 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36649 For details about the different encoding options see section
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36656 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36663 \begin_layout Subsection
36664 Keyboard mapping configuration
36665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36667 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36675 If you have for example a U.
36676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36679 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36680 can use an alternate keymap.
36681 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36687 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36688 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36691 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36698 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36703 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36704 which one you want to use.
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36709 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36710 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36714 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36715 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36716 one to support the characters you want.
36717 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36724 \begin_layout Chapter
36727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36729 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36738 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36739 topic inside the user's guide.
36742 \begin_layout Section
36744 \begin_inset Index idx
36747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36761 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36764 \begin_layout Subsection
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36769 Creates a new document.
36772 \begin_layout Subsection
36776 \begin_layout Standard
36777 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36778 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36779 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36786 \begin_layout Standard
36790 \begin_layout Subsection
36794 \begin_layout Standard
36795 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36796 Click there on a file to open it.
36799 \begin_layout Subsection
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 Closes the current document.
36807 \begin_layout Subsection
36811 \begin_layout Standard
36812 Closes all opened documents.
36815 \begin_layout Subsection
36819 \begin_layout Standard
36820 Saves the actual document.
36823 \begin_layout Subsection
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36831 \begin_layout Subsection
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36836 Saves all opened documents.
36839 \begin_layout Subsection
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36847 \begin_layout Subsection
36851 \begin_layout Standard
36852 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36853 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36854 It is described in the section
36856 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36861 Additional Features
36866 \begin_layout Subsection
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36872 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36874 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36875 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36879 \begin_layout Standard
36880 When using the menu entry
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36888 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36892 \begin_inset space ~
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36905 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36906 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36909 \begin_layout Subsection
36911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36913 name "subsec:Export"
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 You can export your document to various file formats.
36922 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36924 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36925 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36926 during its configuration.
36929 \begin_layout Standard
36930 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36938 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36945 \begin_layout Description
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36954 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36959 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36960 \begin_inset Newline newline
36963 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36964 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36968 \begin_layout Description
36969 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36975 \begin_layout Description
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36980 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36986 \begin_layout Description
36987 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36988 's native DVI-format.
36989 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36990 files paths or file names in your document.
36992 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36999 \begin_layout Description
37000 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37001 in files paths or file names
37004 \begin_layout Description
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37013 ) DVI-format using the program
37015 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37018 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37022 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37030 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37038 \begin_layout Description
37040 \begin_inset space ~
37043 (cropped) the same as
37047 but with cropped page margins.
37050 \begin_layout Description
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37055 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37059 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37064 \begin_layout Description
37068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37076 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37084 \begin_layout Description
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37093 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37097 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37105 \begin_layout Description
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37118 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37119 source that is compilable with the program
37121 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37125 \begin_layout Description
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37134 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37135 source, additionally all images used in the document
37136 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37140 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37143 \begin_layout Description
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37152 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37153 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37154 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37162 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37175 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37176 source that is compilable with the program
37182 \begin_layout Description
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37188 \begin_inset space ~
37195 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37196 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37202 \begin_layout Description
37204 \begin_inset space ~
37207 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37208 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37214 \begin_inset space \space{}
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37238 represent the version number)
37241 \begin_layout Description
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37250 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37251 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37252 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37256 \begin_layout Description
37257 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37258 's internal XHTML engine
37261 \begin_layout Description
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37278 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37283 For the conversion the program
37292 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37295 \begin_layout Description
37296 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37301 \begin_layout Description
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37306 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37308 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37311 For the conversion the program
37320 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37323 \begin_layout Description
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37328 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37329 For the conversion the program
37338 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37341 \begin_layout Description
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37346 (cropped) the same as
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37354 but with cropped page margins
37357 \begin_layout Description
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37366 PDF-format using the program
37370 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37373 \begin_layout Description
37377 \begin_inset space ~
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37394 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37399 \begin_inset space \space{}
37402 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37406 \begin_layout Description
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37415 PDF-format using the program
37417 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37420 , produces PDF-files directly
37423 \begin_layout Description
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37432 PDF-format using the program
37436 , produces PDF-files directly
37439 \begin_layout Description
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37448 PDF-format using the program
37452 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37455 \begin_layout Description
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37464 PDF-format using the program
37469 , produces PDF-files directly
37472 \begin_layout Description
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37484 \begin_layout Description
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37497 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37498 and then exported as text using the program
37503 \begin_layout Description
37508 PostScript format using the program
37516 options see section
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37523 reference "subsec:General-output"
37530 \begin_layout Description
37531 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37532 source and also code in the statistical programming
37546 it is possible to use
37550 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37554 \begin_layout Standard
37555 If one of the menu entries
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37571 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37573 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37581 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37586 \begin_inset Index idx
37589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37599 \begin_layout Subsection
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37605 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37614 reference "sec:Paths"
37619 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37628 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37629 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37630 's preferences as described in section
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37637 reference "subsec:Converters"
37644 \begin_layout Subsection
37645 New and Close Window
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37649 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37653 \begin_layout Subsection
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37661 \begin_layout Section
37663 \begin_inset Index idx
37666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37675 \begin_layout Subsection
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 Described in section
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37687 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37694 \begin_layout Subsection
37695 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37698 \begin_layout Standard
37699 Described in section
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37706 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37713 \begin_layout Subsection
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37719 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37722 \begin_layout Subsection
37726 \begin_layout Standard
37727 Selects the whole document.
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37731 Find & Replace (Quick)
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 Described in section
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37742 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37749 \begin_layout Subsection
37750 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37753 \begin_layout Standard
37754 Described in section
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37761 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37768 \begin_layout Subsection
37769 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37777 \begin_layout Subsection
37781 \begin_layout Standard
37782 Described in section
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37789 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37796 \begin_layout Subsection
37798 \begin_inset Index idx
37801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37802 Paragraph ! Settings
37810 \begin_layout Standard
37811 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37812 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37817 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37818 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37825 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37827 \begin_inset space ~
37835 \begin_layout Subsection
37836 Table and Rows & Columns
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37841 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37842 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37845 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37851 It will dissolve this inset.
37852 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37856 \begin_layout Subsection
37860 \begin_layout Standard
37861 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37862 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37866 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37870 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37872 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37879 reference "sec:Nesting"
37884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37886 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37893 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37900 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37901 nts of the same type.
37903 \begin_inset space ~
37907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37909 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37913 for an explanation.
37916 \begin_layout Section
37918 \begin_inset Index idx
37921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 At the bottom of the
37935 menu the opened documents are listed.
37938 \begin_layout Subsection
37939 Open/Close all Insets
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37943 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37946 \begin_layout Subsection
37947 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37951 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 Math macros are described in the
37962 \begin_layout Subsection
37966 \begin_layout Standard
37967 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37968 \begin_inset space ~
37972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37974 reference "sec:Navigating"
37979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37981 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37988 \begin_layout Subsection
37992 \begin_layout Standard
37993 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38001 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38008 \begin_layout Subsection
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38013 Opens a window showing console messages.
38014 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38019 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38020 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38021 is processing the document.
38024 \begin_layout Subsection
38026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38028 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38033 \begin_inset Index idx
38036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38045 \begin_layout Standard
38046 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38047 All toolbars and the
38050 \begin_inset space ~
38055 can be turned on and off.
38060 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38072 \begin_inset space ~
38084 \begin_inset space ~
38089 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38093 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38105 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38109 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38110 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38111 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38112 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38113 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38118 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38125 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38140 \begin_inset space ~
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38152 \begin_inset space ~
38156 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38165 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38166 's main window vertically while
38169 \begin_inset space ~
38173 \begin_inset space ~
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38185 \begin_inset space ~
38189 \begin_inset space ~
38194 will split it horizontally.
38195 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38196 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38197 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38198 three or more documents at the same time.
38199 To close a split view, use the menu
38202 \begin_inset space ~
38206 \begin_inset space ~
38214 \begin_layout Subsection
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Closes a split view.
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38227 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38228 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38229 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38230 's main window fullscreen.
38231 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38232 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38235 \begin_layout Section
38237 \begin_inset Index idx
38240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38249 \begin_layout Subsection
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38254 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38261 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38272 \begin_layout Subsection
38274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38276 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38283 \begin_layout Standard
38284 Here you can insert the following characters:
38287 \begin_layout Description
38292 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38295 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38296 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38297 -packages you have installed.
38298 You can get a complete display by checking
38301 \begin_inset space ~
38307 \begin_inset Newline newline
38311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38319 Not all characters will be visible in the
38323 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38324 dialog (see section
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38331 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38335 ) can display every character.
38343 \begin_layout Description
38344 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38348 \begin_layout Description
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38354 \begin_inset space ~
38357 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38358 \begin_inset space ~
38362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38364 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38371 \begin_layout Description
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38376 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38379 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38380 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38386 \begin_layout Description
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38391 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38401 \begin_layout Description
38403 \begin_inset space ~
38406 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38410 \begin_layout Description
38412 \begin_inset space ~
38415 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38419 \begin_layout Description
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38424 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38430 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38436 \begin_layout Description
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38441 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38445 \begin_layout Description
38447 \begin_inset space ~
38451 \begin_inset Index idx
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 \begin_inset Index idx
38464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38465 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38470 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38471 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38473 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38479 \begin_inset Index idx
38482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 \begin_inset Newline newline
38493 More information about this feature can be found in the
38499 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38505 \begin_layout Description
38506 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38508 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38509 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38513 \begin_layout Subsection
38517 \begin_layout Standard
38518 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38521 \begin_layout Description
38522 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38523 \begin_inset script superscript
38525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38534 \begin_layout Description
38535 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38536 \begin_inset script subscript
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 \begin_layout Description
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38552 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38559 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38566 \begin_layout Description
38568 \begin_inset space ~
38571 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38572 \begin_inset space ~
38576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38578 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38585 \begin_layout Description
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38590 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38591 \begin_inset space ~
38595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38597 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38604 \begin_layout Description
38606 \begin_inset space ~
38609 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38615 \begin_inset space \space{}
38618 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38619 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38628 To insert a fraction use the command
38633 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38637 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38646 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38653 \begin_layout Description
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38665 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38672 \begin_layout Description
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38677 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38684 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38691 \begin_layout Description
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38696 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38703 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38710 \begin_layout Description
38711 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38718 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38725 \begin_layout Description
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38730 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38737 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38744 \begin_layout Description
38746 \begin_inset space ~
38749 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38756 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38761 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938048
38765 \begin_layout Description
38767 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938353
38769 \begin_inset space ~
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38776 Break Inserts a line break point (ZWSP) that is invisible in the output.
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38784 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38791 for a usage example.
38796 \begin_layout Description
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38805 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38812 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38819 \begin_layout Description
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38824 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38825 as described in section
38826 \begin_inset space ~
38830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38832 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38839 \begin_layout Description
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38844 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38851 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38858 \begin_layout Description
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38863 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38864 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38866 \begin_inset space ~
38870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38872 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38879 \begin_layout Description
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38884 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38885 \begin_inset space ~
38889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38891 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38898 \begin_layout Description
38900 \begin_inset space ~
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38907 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38914 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38921 \begin_layout Subsection
38925 \begin_layout Standard
38926 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38951 are described in section
38952 \begin_inset space ~
38956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38958 reference "sec:toc"
38967 is described in section
38968 \begin_inset space ~
38972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38974 reference "sec:Index"
38982 is described in section
38983 \begin_inset space ~
38987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38989 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38995 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38998 is described in section
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39005 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39012 \begin_layout Subsection
39016 \begin_layout Standard
39017 To insert floats, as described in section
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39024 reference "sec:Floats"
39028 and in detail the chapter
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39043 \begin_layout Subsection
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 To insert notes, described in section
39049 \begin_inset space ~
39053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39055 reference "sec:Notes"
39062 \begin_layout Subsection
39066 \begin_layout Standard
39067 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39069 Branches are described in section
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39076 reference "sec:Branches"
39083 \begin_layout Subsection
39087 \begin_layout Standard
39088 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39089 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39091 An example is the document class
39092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39099 with three custom insets.
39102 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39106 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39112 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39115 \begin_layout Subsection
39117 \begin_inset Index idx
39120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 \begin_layout Standard
39130 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39132 For more information see chapter
39134 External Document Parts
39137 \begin_inset space ~
39143 \begin_layout Subsection
39145 \begin_inset Index idx
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 \begin_layout Standard
39158 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39159 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39166 \begin_inset space ~
39174 \begin_layout Subsection
39178 \begin_layout Standard
39183 dialog as described in section
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39190 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39197 \begin_layout Subsection
39201 \begin_layout Standard
39206 as described in section
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39213 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39220 \begin_layout Subsection
39224 \begin_layout Standard
39229 as described in section
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39236 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39243 \begin_layout Subsection
39245 \begin_inset Index idx
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 \begin_inset Index idx
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39259 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39267 \begin_layout Standard
39268 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39269 Floats are described in section
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39276 reference "sec:Floats"
39280 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39282 Multi-page Captions
39287 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_layout Subsection
39299 \begin_layout Standard
39300 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39307 reference "sec:Index"
39314 \begin_layout Subsection
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39320 \begin_inset space ~
39324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39326 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39333 \begin_layout Subsection
39337 \begin_layout Standard
39338 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39339 Tables are described in section
39340 \begin_inset space ~
39344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39346 reference "sec:Tables"
39350 and in detail in the chapter
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39365 \begin_layout Subsection
39369 \begin_layout Standard
39375 Graphics are described in section
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39382 reference "sec:Graphics"
39389 \begin_layout Subsection
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39394 Inserts a URL as described in section
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39401 reference "subsec:URLs"
39408 \begin_layout Subsection
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39420 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39439 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39446 \begin_layout Subsection
39450 \begin_layout Standard
39451 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39458 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39465 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39470 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39471 title or caption of a float.
39472 Inserts a short title as described in section
39473 \begin_inset space ~
39477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39479 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39491 \begin_layout Standard
39492 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39493 Code box as described in section
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39500 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39509 \begin_inset Index idx
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 \begin_layout Standard
39522 Inserts a program listings box.
39523 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39525 Program Code Listings
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39538 \begin_layout Subsection
39542 \begin_layout Standard
39543 Inserts the actual date.
39544 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39549 \begin_layout Subsection
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39561 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39568 \begin_layout Section
39570 \begin_inset Index idx
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39582 \begin_layout Standard
39583 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39587 of the current document.
39588 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39591 \begin_layout Subsection
39595 \begin_layout Standard
39596 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39597 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39598 to jump, for example, between section
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39604 \begin_inset space ~
39607 2.5 and use the submenu
39610 \begin_inset space ~
39614 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39637 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39641 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39647 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39650 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39653 \begin_layout Standard
39654 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39663 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39671 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39674 \begin_layout Subsection
39675 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39683 \begin_layout Subsection
39687 \begin_layout Standard
39688 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39689 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39690 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39706 \begin_layout Subsection
39710 \begin_layout Standard
39711 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39714 The \SpecialChar LyX
39715 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39717 \begin_inset space ~
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39730 manual for a detailed description.
39733 \begin_layout Section
39735 \begin_inset Index idx
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39747 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 \begin_layout Standard
39752 Change Tracking is described in section
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39759 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39766 \begin_layout Subsection
39774 \begin_layout Standard
39775 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39776 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39777 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39779 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39780 to the clipboard or update the view.
39781 \begin_inset Newline newline
39784 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39788 \begin_layout Standard
39791 Open Containing Directory
39793 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39794 's temporary folder for the document.
39795 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39796 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39797 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39798 For example some journals require to send the
39802 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39806 \begin_layout Subsection
39807 Start Appendix Here
39810 \begin_layout Standard
39811 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39812 as described in section
39813 \begin_inset space ~
39817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39819 reference "sec:Appendices"
39826 \begin_layout Subsection
39828 \begin_inset space ~
39834 \begin_layout Standard
39835 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39836 default output format for the document (menu
39838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39839 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39840 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39842 \begin_inset space ~
39846 \begin_inset space ~
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39858 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39862 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39871 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39876 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39894 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39898 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39899 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39901 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39902 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39907 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39912 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39922 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39927 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39928 when it is first configured.
39929 The default output format is
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39940 \begin_layout Subsection
39941 View (Other Formats)
39944 \begin_layout Standard
39945 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39946 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39947 actual document with an external program.
39948 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39949 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39950 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39952 All possible formats are listed in section
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39959 reference "subsec:Export"
39964 You should at least see the menu entry
39969 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39971 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39984 \begin_inset Index idx
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39997 \begin_layout Standard
39998 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39999 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40002 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40007 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40012 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40022 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40027 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40028 when it is first configured.
40031 \begin_layout Subsection
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40039 \begin_layout Standard
40040 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40041 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40044 \begin_layout Subsection
40045 Update (Other Formats)
40048 \begin_layout Standard
40049 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40050 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40053 \begin_layout Subsection
40054 View Master Document
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40058 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40079 manual for more information on this topic).
40080 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40081 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40085 \begin_inset space ~
40089 \begin_inset space ~
40094 generates the output of the whole book, while
40098 will just output the chapter alone.
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40102 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40103 in the document settings (menu
40105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40107 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40125 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40129 ) or in the preferences (menu
40131 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40132 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40137 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40142 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40160 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40167 \begin_layout Subsection
40168 Update Master Document
40171 \begin_layout Standard
40172 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40193 manual for more information on this topic).
40194 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40195 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40198 \begin_layout Standard
40199 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40200 in the document settings (menu
40202 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40203 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40204 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40206 \begin_inset space ~
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40222 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40226 ) or in the preferences (menu
40228 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40229 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40234 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40257 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40264 \begin_layout Subsection
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40268 name "subsec:Compressed"
40275 \begin_layout Standard
40276 Un/compresses the current document.
40277 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40278 compression (see the
40280 Additional Features
40282 manual for details).
40285 \begin_layout Subsection
40289 \begin_layout Standard
40290 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40293 \begin_layout Subsection
40297 \begin_layout Standard
40298 The document settings are described in appendix
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40305 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40312 \begin_layout Section
40314 \begin_inset Index idx
40317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40326 \begin_layout Subsection
40330 \begin_layout Standard
40331 Spell checking is explained in section
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40338 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40345 \begin_layout Subsection
40349 \begin_layout Standard
40350 The thesaurus is described in section
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40357 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40364 \begin_layout Subsection
40366 \begin_inset Index idx
40369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40376 \begin_inset Index idx
40379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 \begin_layout Standard
40389 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40390 the highlighted document part.
40393 \begin_layout Subsection
40399 \begin_inset Index idx
40402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40403 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40412 \begin_layout Standard
40413 Generates with the help of the program
40415 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40418 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40419 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40420 This feature is not available on Windows.
40423 \begin_layout Subsection
40429 \begin_inset Index idx
40432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40442 \begin_layout Standard
40443 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40453 to see the full filename paths.
40456 \begin_layout Subsection
40458 \begin_inset Index idx
40461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40470 \begin_layout Standard
40471 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40472 files as described in section
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40479 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40486 \begin_layout Subsection
40488 \begin_inset Index idx
40491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40522 \begin_inset Index idx
40525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40526 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40535 \begin_layout Standard
40536 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40537 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40538 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40539 -packages and programs it needs; see
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40547 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40554 \begin_layout Subsection
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40563 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40570 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40577 \begin_layout Section
40579 \begin_inset Index idx
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40592 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40593 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40595 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40599 \begin_layout Standard
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40608 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40609 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40610 packages and classes found
40611 by \SpecialChar LyX
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40619 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40635 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40640 \begin_layout Section
40642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40644 name "sec:Toolbars"
40651 \begin_layout Standard
40652 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40653 \begin_inset space ~
40657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40659 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40666 \begin_layout Standard
40667 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40668 This is described in the
40670 Additional Features
40675 \begin_layout Subsection
40677 \begin_inset Index idx
40680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 \begin_inset Graphics
40691 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40700 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40706 \begin_layout Standard
40707 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40724 \begin_inset Note Note
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40728 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40733 manual for more information.
40741 \begin_layout Standard
40742 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40748 \begin_layout Standard
40749 \begin_inset Tabular
40750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40751 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40752 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 \begin_inset Graphics
40760 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40774 pull-down box for the environments
40787 \begin_layout Standard
40788 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40796 \begin_inset Tabular
40797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40798 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40799 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40800 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40884 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40900 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40930 arg "spelling-continuously"
40938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40942 Spellcheck continuously
40948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40971 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41031 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41061 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41091 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41147 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41180 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41203 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41204 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 Emphasize text, function of the
41234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41239 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 Set text to noun style, function of the
41271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41294 arg "textstyle-apply"
41302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41306 Format text using the current settings in the
41308 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41313 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41346 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41366 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41394 arg "tabular-insert"
41402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41436 Toggle outline window on/off,
41438 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41454 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41466 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41481 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41493 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41506 \begin_layout Subsection
41508 \begin_inset Index idx
41511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41520 \begin_layout Standard
41521 \begin_inset Graphics
41522 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41530 \begin_layout Standard
41531 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41537 \begin_layout Standard
41538 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41542 \begin_layout Standard
41543 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41549 \begin_layout Standard
41550 \begin_inset Tabular
41551 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41552 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41553 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41554 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41591 arg "layout Enumerate"
41599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 arg "layout Itemize"
41626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 arg "layout Description"
41680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41699 arg "depth-increment"
41707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 arg "depth-decrement"
41745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41757 \begin_inset space ~
41766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41775 arg "float-insert figure"
41783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41790 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 arg "float-insert table"
41814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41821 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41867 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41897 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 arg "nomencl-insert"
41969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41995 arg "footnote-insert"
42003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42025 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42074 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42094 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42188 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42203 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42234 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42254 arg "dialog-show character"
42262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42270 \begin_inset space ~
42273 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42289 arg "layout-paragraph"
42297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42323 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42337 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42351 \begin_layout Subsection
42352 View/Update Toolbar
42353 \begin_inset Index idx
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 Toolbar ! View / Update
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42366 \begin_inset Graphics
42367 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42375 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42386 \begin_layout Standard
42387 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42393 \begin_layout Standard
42394 \begin_inset Tabular
42395 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42396 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42397 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42398 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42438 arg "buffer-update"
42446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42468 arg "master-buffer-view"
42476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42484 \begin_inset space ~
42493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42502 arg "master-buffer-update"
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42540 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42554 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42555 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42556 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42557 Synchronize with Output
42563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42587 View (Other Formats)
42593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42600 arg "update-others"
42608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42615 Update (Other Formats)
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42629 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42633 \begin_layout Subsection
42637 \begin_layout Standard
42638 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42645 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42649 , the table toolbar
42650 \begin_inset Index idx
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42667 manual and the math macro toolbar
42668 \begin_inset Index idx
42671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 \begin_layout Chapter
42685 The Document Settings
42686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42688 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42693 \begin_inset Index idx
42696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42697 Document ! Settings
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42709 \begin_inset space ~
42714 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42715 is called with the menu
42717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42721 You can save your document settings as default with the
42723 Save as Document Defaults
42725 button in any dialog.
42726 This will create a template named
42730 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42731 when you create a new document without
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42740 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42741 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42744 \begin_layout Standard
42745 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42746 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42747 to find the one you are looking for.
42748 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42749 the submenus of the dialog.
42751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42755 \begin_inset space \space{}
42759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42766 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42767 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42768 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42771 \begin_layout Section
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42776 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42778 Document classes are described in section
42779 \begin_inset space ~
42783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42785 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42797 \begin_inset space ~
42802 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42807 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42808 as a layout for a document class.
42809 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42811 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42820 \begin_layout Standard
42821 Some classes use special class options by default.
42822 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42826 and you can decide to use them or not.
42827 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42828 recommended you leave them untouched.
42833 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42834 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42839 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42841 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42847 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42848 \begin_inset Newline newline
42853 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42856 \begin_inset Newline newline
42859 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42860 distribution, see section
42865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42867 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42880 \begin_layout Standard
42885 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42886 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42887 in the background if the child document
42888 is opened without its master.
42889 This way child documents are always compilable.
42890 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42905 \begin_layout Standard
42906 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42922 packages ! prettyref
42928 \begin_inset Index idx
42931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42933 packages ! refstyle
42938 for cross-references, see section
42939 \begin_inset space ~
42943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42945 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42952 \begin_layout Section
42956 \begin_layout Standard
42957 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42958 Please refer to the section
42961 \begin_inset space ~
42969 \begin_inset space ~
42974 manual for details.
42977 \begin_layout Section
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42982 Modules are explained in section
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42989 reference "subsec:Modules"
42996 \begin_layout Section
43000 \begin_layout Standard
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43008 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43015 \begin_layout Section
43019 \begin_layout Standard
43020 The document font settings are described in section
43021 \begin_inset space ~
43025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43027 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43034 \begin_layout Section
43038 \begin_layout Standard
43039 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43051 \begin_inset space ~
43056 and whether it should be a
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43064 can also be specified here.
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43068 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43069 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43070 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43072 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43075 \begin_layout Standard
43078 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43081 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43082 justifies the text on screen.
43083 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43087 \begin_layout Section
43091 \begin_layout Standard
43092 This dialog is described in sections
43093 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43099 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43106 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43113 \begin_layout Section
43117 \begin_layout Standard
43118 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43125 reference "subsec:Margins"
43132 \begin_layout Section
43134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43136 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43141 \begin_inset Index idx
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43145 Language ! Encoding
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43154 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43155 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43156 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43158 is always encoded in utf8).
43159 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43160 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43161 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43162 -command is not known for
43163 a particular character).
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 If you use the option
43172 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43173 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43174 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43176 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43177 exactly one encoding.
43178 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43181 \begin_layout Standard
43183 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43184 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43185 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43186 installation supports Unicode), choose
43187 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43188 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43189 is quite incomplete, so
43190 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43195 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43196 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43197 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43198 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43199 -commands is not used, because all
43200 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43201 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43202 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43203 , two new alternative engines
43204 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43206 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43208 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43239 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43244 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43248 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43255 \begin_inset space ~
43260 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43261 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43271 The possible settings are:
43274 \begin_layout Description
43275 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43278 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43288 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43295 \begin_layout Description
43296 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43297 format you will use.
43298 In many cases this will be
43303 \begin_inset Index idx
43306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 If the newer package
43319 \begin_inset Index idx
43322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43324 packages ! polyglossia
43329 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43330 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43331 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43333 this package will be used instead of
43340 \begin_layout Description
43342 \begin_inset space ~
43353 would be more appropriate.
43356 \begin_layout Description
43357 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43358 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43362 (for German texts), type in
43365 \begin_inset Newline newline
43370 usepackage{ngerman}
43373 \begin_layout Description
43374 None will not use a language package.
43375 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43378 \begin_layout Standard
43379 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43392 \begin_inset space ~
43399 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43405 \begin_inset Index idx
43408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43410 packages ! inputenc
43416 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43417 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43418 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43422 \begin_layout Description
43423 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43425 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43426 commands, which may result in a big
43427 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43428 -commands are needed.
43431 \begin_layout Description
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43440 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43443 \begin_layout Description
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43452 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43455 \begin_layout Description
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43460 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43463 \begin_layout Description
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43472 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43473 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43476 \begin_layout Description
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_inset space ~
43485 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43489 \begin_layout Description
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43498 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43499 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43502 \begin_layout Description
43504 \begin_inset space ~
43508 \begin_inset space ~
43512 \begin_inset space ~
43515 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43522 \begin_layout Description
43524 \begin_inset space ~
43528 \begin_inset space ~
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43535 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43536 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43539 \begin_layout Description
43541 \begin_inset space ~
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43548 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43549 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43550 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43551 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43562 \begin_layout Description
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43568 \begin_inset space ~
43571 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43572 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43573 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43575 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43576 \begin_inset space ~
43580 \begin_inset space ~
43586 \begin_layout Description
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43592 \begin_inset space ~
43595 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43598 \begin_layout Description
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43607 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43610 \begin_layout Description
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43616 \begin_inset space ~
43619 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43622 \begin_layout Description
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43630 \begin_layout Description
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43635 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43638 \begin_layout Description
43640 \begin_inset space ~
43644 \begin_inset space ~
43647 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43650 \begin_layout Description
43652 \begin_inset space ~
43656 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_layout Description
43664 \begin_inset space ~
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43671 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43674 \begin_layout Description
43676 \begin_inset space ~
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43686 \begin_layout Description
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43695 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43701 \begin_inset Index idx
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43711 , when using this, set the document language to
43716 \begin_layout Description
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43725 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43730 , when using this, set the document language to
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43739 \begin_layout Description
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43748 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43754 \begin_inset Index idx
43757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43759 packages ! japanese
43764 , when using this, set the document language to
43769 \begin_layout Description
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43778 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43783 , when using this, set the document language to
43788 \begin_layout Description
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43797 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43802 , when using this, set the document language to
43807 \begin_layout Description
43809 \begin_inset space ~
43812 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43815 \begin_layout Description
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43828 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43831 \begin_layout Description
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43844 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43845 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43846 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43849 \begin_layout Description
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43855 \begin_inset space ~
43861 \begin_layout Description
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43870 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43871 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43874 \begin_layout Description
43876 \begin_inset space ~
43880 \begin_inset space ~
43883 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43889 \begin_inset Index idx
43892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43899 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43902 \begin_layout Description
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43915 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43922 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43925 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43932 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43933 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43935 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43938 \begin_layout Description
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43947 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43953 \begin_inset Index idx
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43963 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43966 \begin_layout Description
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43971 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43977 \begin_inset Index idx
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43982 packages ! inputenc
43988 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43992 \begin_layout Description
43994 \begin_inset space ~
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44002 \begin_inset space ~
44005 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44012 \begin_layout Description
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44025 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44026 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44027 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44031 \begin_layout Description
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44044 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44045 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44048 \begin_layout Section
44050 \begin_inset Index idx
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44060 \begin_inset Index idx
44063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44070 \begin_inset Index idx
44073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44074 Color ! Shaded boxes
44080 \begin_inset Index idx
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44084 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44092 \begin_layout Standard
44093 Here you can alter the font color for the
44097 (default: black), for
44100 \begin_inset space ~
44105 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44109 (default: white) and for
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44122 sets the color back to the default.
44125 \begin_layout Standard
44126 Clicking any button showing
44134 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44135 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44136 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44137 later more quickly.
44140 \begin_layout Standard
44141 Note, if you change the
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44149 font color and use the option
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44157 in the document settings under
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44165 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44172 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44179 \begin_layout Standard
44180 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44186 \begin_layout Standard
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44199 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44205 Code after a forced page break:
44208 \begin_layout Itemize
44209 For the page color:
44210 \begin_inset Newline newline
44217 pagecolor{color name}
44220 \begin_layout Itemize
44221 For the text color:
44222 \begin_inset Newline newline
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44233 You are restricted to one of
44269 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44282 \begin_inset Newline newline
44285 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44286 names to refer to them:
44289 \begin_layout Itemize
44295 \begin_inset Newline newline
44300 page_backgroundcolor
44303 \begin_layout Itemize
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44313 \begin_inset Newline newline
44321 \begin_layout Itemize
44325 \begin_inset space ~
44331 \begin_inset Newline newline
44339 \begin_layout Itemize
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44349 \begin_inset Newline newline
44357 \begin_layout Standard
44358 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44369 \begin_inset space ~
44377 \begin_layout Section
44381 \begin_layout Standard
44382 Here you can adjust the
44386 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44390 as described in section
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44397 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44404 \begin_layout Section
44408 \begin_layout Standard
44409 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44415 \begin_inset Index idx
44418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 packages ! biblatex
44430 \begin_inset Index idx
44433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44445 \begin_inset Index idx
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44456 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44459 Sectioned bibliography
44461 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44467 \begin_inset Index idx
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 packages ! bibtopic
44482 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44483 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44487 for the generation of the bibliography.
44488 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44489 \begin_inset space ~
44493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44495 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44502 \begin_layout Section
44506 \begin_layout Standard
44507 Here you can define the
44511 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44519 reference "sec:Index"
44526 \begin_layout Section
44530 \begin_layout Standard
44531 The PDF properties are explained in section
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44538 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44545 \begin_layout Section
44549 \begin_layout Standard
44550 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44551 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44557 \begin_inset Index idx
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44572 \begin_inset Index idx
44575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44587 \begin_inset Index idx
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 \begin_inset Index idx
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44617 \begin_inset Index idx
44620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44622 packages ! mathdots
44632 \begin_inset Index idx
44635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44637 packages ! mathtools
44647 \begin_inset Index idx
44650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44662 \begin_inset Index idx
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44667 packages ! stackrel
44677 \begin_inset Index idx
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44682 packages ! stmaryrd
44692 \begin_inset Index idx
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 packages ! undertilde
44702 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44705 \begin_layout Description
44706 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44707 -errors in formulas,
44708 ensure that you have this enabled.
44711 \begin_layout Description
44712 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44713 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44714 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44718 \begin_layout Description
44719 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_layout Description
44735 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44750 \begin_layout Description
44751 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44762 \begin_layout Description
44763 mathtools is used for the math commands
44799 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44806 \begin_layout Description
44807 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44809 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44818 \begin_layout Description
44819 stackrel is used for the math command
44836 \begin_layout Description
44837 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44840 \begin_layout Description
44841 undertilde is used for the math command
44849 Accents for one Character
44858 \begin_layout Section
44862 \begin_layout Standard
44863 The float placement options are described in the section
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44874 \begin_inset space ~
44882 \begin_layout Section
44886 \begin_layout Standard
44887 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44889 Program Code Listings
44894 \begin_inset space ~
44902 \begin_layout Section
44906 \begin_layout Standard
44907 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44915 set to be used and set the
44920 The itemize environment is described in section
44921 \begin_inset space ~
44925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44927 reference "sec:Itemize"
44934 \begin_layout Standard
44935 You can furthermore specify a
44938 \begin_inset space ~
44943 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44944 command of the desired character.
44945 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44952 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44958 \begin_inset space \space{}
44962 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44972 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44973 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44976 \begin_layout Standard
44977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44985 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44986 -packages in the preamble (menu
44989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44990 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44999 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45003 usepackage{textcomp}
45006 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45010 usepackage{amssymb}
45020 \begin_layout Section
45024 \begin_layout Standard
45025 Branches are described in section
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45032 reference "sec:Branches"
45039 \begin_layout Section
45041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45043 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45050 \begin_layout Standard
45051 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45054 \begin_layout Description
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45063 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45083 View Master Document
45084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45091 Update Master Document
45092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45099 menu or the toolbar.
45100 The default is set in
45102 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45103 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45118 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45125 \begin_layout Description
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45134 Output settings for the menu
45136 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45144 For a detailed description see section
45146 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45159 \begin_layout Description
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45168 Options offers settings for the export format
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45181 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45185 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45194 settings are described in detail in section
45196 Math Output in XHTML
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45214 \begin_inset space ~
45219 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45222 \begin_layout Description
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45229 Save transient properties
45231 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45232 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45233 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45237 \begin_layout Itemize
45238 the activation of change tracking
45241 \begin_layout Itemize
45242 the output of tracked changes
45245 \begin_layout Itemize
45246 the recording of the document directory path.
45249 \begin_layout Standard
45250 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45251 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45255 \begin_layout Section
45263 \begin_layout Standard
45264 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45266 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45268 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45270 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45274 \begin_layout Standard
45275 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45276 -syntax is given in section
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45283 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45290 \begin_layout Chapter
45296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45298 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45303 \begin_inset Index idx
45306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45315 \begin_layout Standard
45316 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45318 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45322 It has the following submenus.
45325 \begin_layout Section
45329 \begin_layout Subsection
45333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45334 User Interface File
45335 \begin_inset Index idx
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 Customization ! of toolbars
45345 \begin_inset Index idx
45348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 Customization ! of menus
45357 \begin_layout Standard
45358 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45359 interface (ui) file.
45360 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45368 \begin_layout Description
45373 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45376 \begin_layout Description
45383 the menu entries in popup context menus
45386 \begin_layout Description
45391 specifies the toolbar buttons
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45396 and edit the entries.
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45400 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45412 entries must be finished with an explicit
45437 and in the case of the
45438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45450 The syntax for the entries is:
45453 \begin_layout Standard
45454 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45483 \begin_layout Standard
45485 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45488 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45489 -functions are listed in the menu
45491 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_layout Standard
45502 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45508 \begin_layout Standard
45509 For example, assuming you use the menu
45511 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45514 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45518 \begin_layout Standard
45519 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45543 \begin_layout Standard
45545 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45560 to have the sixth bookmark.
45563 \begin_layout Standard
45567 \begin_inset space ~
45572 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45573 's toolbar buttons.
45574 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45575 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45578 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45590 \begin_layout Standard
45593 Enable tool tips in main work area
45595 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45603 \begin_layout Standard
45608 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45609 should display in the menu
45611 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45621 \begin_layout Subsection
45625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45632 Restore window layouts and geometries
45635 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45636 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45640 \begin_layout Standard
45643 Restore cursor positions
45645 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45649 \begin_layout Standard
45652 Load opened files from last session
45654 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45658 \begin_layout Standard
45661 Clear all session information
45663 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45664 sessions (cursor positions, names
45665 of last opened documents, etc.).
45668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45672 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45677 \begin_inset Index idx
45680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45689 \begin_layout Standard
45692 Backup original documents when saving
45694 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45695 it was saved the last time.
45696 It is stored in the
45699 \begin_inset space ~
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45711 reference "sec:Paths"
45715 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45718 \begin_inset space ~
45724 The backup file has the file extension
45725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45739 \begin_layout Standard
45742 Backup documents, every
45744 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45750 Save documents compressed by default
45752 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45753 \begin_inset space ~
45757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45759 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45764 This applies to newly created documents only.
45765 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45769 Windows & work area
45772 \begin_layout Standard
45775 Open documents in tabs
45777 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45781 \begin_layout Standard
45786 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 \begin_inset space ~
45797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45799 reference "sec:Paths"
45803 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45810 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45811 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45812 of \SpecialChar LyX
45814 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45815 instance is created for each file.
45818 \begin_layout Standard
45821 Single close-tab button
45823 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45833 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45834 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45835 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45839 \begin_layout Standard
45840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45848 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45849 before the change takes effect.
45857 \begin_layout Standard
45862 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45864 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45866 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45870 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45871 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45872 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45875 \begin_layout Subsection
45877 \begin_inset Index idx
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45889 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45897 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45901 \begin_layout Standard
45902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 This section only deals with the fonts
45914 the \SpecialChar LyX
45916 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45920 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45931 \begin_layout Standard
45932 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45949 (depends on the system) as its
45952 \begin_inset space ~
45968 \begin_layout Standard
45969 You can change the font size with the
45976 \begin_layout Standard
45981 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45986 points have the size of 1
45987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45997 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46002 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46007 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46014 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46021 \begin_layout Standard
46024 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46026 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46027 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46028 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46029 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46030 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46032 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46039 \begin_layout Subsection
46041 \begin_inset Index idx
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46045 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46052 \begin_inset Index idx
46055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 \begin_layout Standard
46065 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46066 by choosing an item in the
46067 list and selecting the
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46075 By checking the option
46079 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46082 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46083 \begin_inset space ~
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46092 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46095 \begin_layout Subsection
46097 \begin_inset Index idx
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 \begin_layout Standard
46110 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46119 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46120 This feature is described in section
46121 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46127 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46134 \begin_layout Standard
46135 Checking the option
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46142 \begin_inset space ~
46146 \begin_inset space ~
46151 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46154 \begin_layout Section
46156 \begin_inset Index idx
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 \begin_layout Subsection
46172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46176 \begin_layout Standard
46179 Cursor follows scrollbar
46181 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46185 \begin_layout Standard
46186 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46187 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46188 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46191 \begin_layout Standard
46194 Scroll below end of document
46196 is self-explanatory.
46199 \begin_layout Standard
46200 In \SpecialChar LyX
46201 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46208 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46210 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46211 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46214 \begin_layout Standard
46217 Sort environments alphabetically
46219 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46222 \begin_layout Standard
46225 Group environments by their category
46227 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46230 \begin_layout Standard
46235 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46250 \begin_layout Standard
46251 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46256 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46257 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46261 \begin_layout Subsection
46263 \begin_inset Index idx
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 \begin_inset Index idx
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 Settings ! Shortcuts
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46290 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46292 Several binding files are available, among them:
46295 \begin_layout Description
46296 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46299 \begin_layout Description
46300 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46312 \begin_layout Description
46313 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46324 \begin_layout Standard
46325 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46330 , and binding files for special languages.
46331 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46336 \begin_inset space \space{}
46340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46348 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46349 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46350 will try to use the appropriate binding
46354 \begin_layout Standard
46355 Some binding files, like
46359 , only have a limited scope.
46360 When looking at the end of the file
46364 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46367 \begin_layout Standard
46371 \begin_inset space ~
46375 \begin_inset space ~
46380 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46381 in the selected key binding file.
46384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46388 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46393 \begin_inset Index idx
46396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46397 Key Bindings ! Editing
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46407 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46408 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46409 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46412 Show key-bindings containing
46415 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46416 Insert there for example as keyword
46417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46424 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46425 functions that contain
46426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46434 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46435 All \SpecialChar LyX
46436 functions are also listed in the file
46441 that you will find in the
46448 \begin_layout Standard
46449 For example, to add the shortcut
46457 , select the function and press the
46462 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46463 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46466 \begin_layout Standard
46467 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46468 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46470 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46471 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46473 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46478 \begin_layout Standard
46479 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46482 \begin_layout Standard
46483 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46485 The syntax of the entries is:
46488 \begin_layout Standard
46494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46513 \begin_layout Standard
46514 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46515 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46543 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46544 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46545 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46546 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46548 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46552 , you needed to specify it as
46557 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46560 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46563 \begin_layout Subsection
46565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46567 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46572 \begin_inset Index idx
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46582 \begin_inset Index idx
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46586 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46594 \begin_layout Standard
46595 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46596 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46597 provides keyboard maps.
46598 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46599 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46606 \begin_inset space ~
46611 and select the keyboard map file named
46618 \begin_layout Standard
46627 keyboard map and, if you use the
46631 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46634 arg "keymap-primary"
46640 arg "keymap-secondary"
46643 respectively or toggle between them with
46646 arg "keymap-toggle"
46652 \begin_layout Standard
46653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46670 \begin_layout Standard
46671 You can also specify the mouse
46673 Wheel scrolling speed
46676 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46680 Middle mouse button pasting
46682 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46683 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46698 \begin_inset space ~
46703 you can select a key for zooming.
46704 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46707 \begin_layout Subsection
46711 \begin_layout Standard
46712 Input completion is described in section
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46719 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46726 \begin_layout Section
46728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46735 \begin_inset Index idx
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 \begin_inset Index idx
46748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 \begin_layout Standard
46758 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46759 are normally determined during
46761 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46764 \begin_layout Description
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46769 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46770 's working directory.
46771 It is the default when you
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46790 \begin_layout Description
46792 \begin_inset space ~
46795 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46797 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46799 \begin_inset space ~
46803 \begin_inset space ~
46811 \begin_layout Description
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46816 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46822 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46826 \begin_inset Newline newline
46830 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46843 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46851 \begin_layout Description
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46857 \begin_inset Index idx
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46866 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46867 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46874 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46882 will be used to save the backups.
46883 \begin_inset Newline newline
46886 Backup files have the ending
46887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46897 \begin_layout Description
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46902 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46903 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46905 \begin_inset Newline newline
46912 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46918 You can edit this file with the program
46927 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46928 in its preferences under
46931 \begin_inset space ~
46937 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46942 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46944 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46945 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46951 and \SpecialChar LyX
46952 need to be running the same time.
46953 \begin_inset Newline newline
46956 The pipe is also used for the
46960 feature, see section
46961 \begin_inset space ~
46965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46967 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46972 \begin_inset Newline newline
46975 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46976 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46977 \begin_inset Newline newline
46993 \begin_layout Description
46995 \begin_inset space ~
46998 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47001 \begin_layout Description
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47006 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47007 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47008 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47011 \begin_layout Description
47013 \begin_inset space ~
47016 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47022 You only need to specify it if you are using
47026 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47028 For \SpecialChar LyX
47033 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47037 \begin_layout Description
47039 \begin_inset space ~
47042 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47043 When \SpecialChar LyX
47044 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47045 to find it on the system.
47046 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47048 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47057 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47058 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47061 \begin_layout Description
47063 \begin_inset space ~
47066 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47067 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47068 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47069 code or in the document
47071 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47073 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47074 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47075 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47076 scanned for the input files.
47077 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47078 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47080 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47081 compilation may fail for some documents.
47084 \begin_layout Section
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47089 Here you can insert your
47098 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47100 \begin_inset space ~
47104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47106 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47110 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47113 \begin_layout Section
47115 \begin_inset Index idx
47118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47119 Language ! Settings
47125 \begin_inset Index idx
47128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 Settings ! Language
47137 \begin_layout Subsection
47139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47141 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47148 \begin_layout Description
47150 \begin_inset space ~
47154 \begin_inset space ~
47157 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47159 You can find its actual translation status here:
47160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47162 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47170 \begin_layout Description
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47175 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47176 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47177 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47178 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47195 The most widespread language package is
47200 \begin_inset Index idx
47203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47210 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47212 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47213 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47214 come with the alternative
47220 \begin_inset Index idx
47223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47225 packages ! polyglossia
47230 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47231 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47237 The available selections are described in section
47238 \begin_inset space ~
47242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47244 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47251 \begin_layout Description
47253 \begin_inset space ~
47256 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47257 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47258 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47259 An example is the start command
47265 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47267 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47287 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47292 \begin_layout Description
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47302 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47303 command toggles the package on and off.
47306 \begin_layout Description
47308 \begin_inset space ~
47312 \begin_inset space ~
47315 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47319 \begin_layout Description
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_inset space ~
47328 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47338 \begin_inset space ~
47341 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47342 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47343 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47345 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47352 \begin_layout Description
47354 \begin_inset space ~
47357 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47359 When this option is not set, the
47362 \begin_inset space ~
47367 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47369 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47380 \begin_layout Description
47382 \begin_inset space ~
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47394 When it is not set, the
47397 \begin_inset space ~
47402 is set to the end of the document.
47405 \begin_layout Description
47407 \begin_inset space ~
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47414 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47415 language will be underlined in blue.
47418 \begin_layout Description
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47427 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47428 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47431 \begin_layout Description
47433 \begin_inset space ~
47436 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47437 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47438 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47439 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47442 \begin_layout Subsection
47446 \begin_layout Standard
47447 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47448 \begin_inset space ~
47452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47454 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47461 \begin_layout Section
47465 \begin_layout Subsection
47467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47469 name "subsec:General-output"
47476 \begin_layout Description
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47481 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47483 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47491 For a detailed description see section
47493 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47498 \begin_inset space ~
47506 \begin_layout Description
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47511 Options Options for the program
47515 that is used for the export format
47520 \begin_inset space ~
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47526 reference "subsec:Export"
47531 Possible options are listed in the
47536 \begin_inset Newline newline
47540 \begin_inset Flex URL
47543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47545 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47555 \begin_layout Description
47557 \begin_inset space ~
47561 \begin_inset space ~
47564 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47567 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47568 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47570 \begin_inset space ~
47576 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47579 \begin_layout Description
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47585 \begin_inset Index idx
47588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47595 \begin_inset Index idx
47598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47599 Settings ! Date format
47604 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47605 \begin_inset Newline newline
47609 \begin_inset Flex URL
47612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47614 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47620 \begin_inset Newline newline
47623 For example the format
47624 \begin_inset Newline newline
47628 \begin_inset Newline newline
47631 prints the date as day/month/year.
47634 \begin_layout Description
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47643 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47644 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47647 \begin_layout Subsection
47653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47655 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47660 \begin_inset Index idx
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47664 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47673 \begin_layout Description
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47690 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47695 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47716 are used for Cyrillic.
47717 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47730 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47732 sets up in the background.
47733 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47736 \begin_layout Description
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47746 \begin_inset space ~
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47753 options They only have an effect when the program
47757 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47761 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47762 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47763 manuals of the applications.
47766 \begin_layout Description
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47771 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47772 \begin_inset space ~
47776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47778 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47785 \begin_layout Description
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47790 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47797 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47804 \begin_layout Description
47806 \begin_inset space ~
47809 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47810 \begin_inset space ~
47814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47816 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47823 \begin_layout Description
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47832 command Command for the program
47834 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47837 that is described in the section
47839 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47844 Additional Features
47849 \begin_layout Standard
47850 There are additionally the following options:
47853 \begin_layout Description
47855 \begin_inset space ~
47859 \begin_inset space ~
47863 \begin_inset space ~
47867 \begin_inset space ~
47872 \begin_inset space ~
47875 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47893 to separate folders.
47894 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47896 \begin_inset Index idx
47899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47906 \begin_inset Index idx
47909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47918 \begin_layout Description
47920 \begin_inset space ~
47924 \begin_inset space ~
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47936 \begin_inset space ~
47940 \begin_inset space ~
47943 changes Removes all manually set
47949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47957 dialog when changing the document class.
47960 \begin_layout Section
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47966 \begin_inset Index idx
47969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47978 \begin_layout Subsection
47980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47982 name "subsec:Converters"
47987 \begin_inset Index idx
47990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47999 \begin_layout Standard
48000 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48001 from one format to another.
48002 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48003 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48010 \begin_inset space ~
48015 field and press the
48020 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48029 drop-down list, modify the
48033 field and press the
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48043 Converter File Cache
48049 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48051 Maximum Age (in days
48054 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48055 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48058 \begin_layout Standard
48059 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48060 definition, is described in the section
48071 \begin_layout Subsection
48073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48075 name "sec:File-Formats"
48080 \begin_inset Index idx
48083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48102 \begin_layout Standard
48103 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48113 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48116 \begin_layout Standard
48117 You can also define the
48119 Default output format
48121 that is used when you use
48123 View, Update, View Master Document
48127 Update Master Document
48133 menu or the toolbar.
48136 \begin_layout Standard
48137 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48148 \begin_layout Standard
48149 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48151 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48152 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48153 This is done by specifying a
48158 More about this is described in the section
48169 \begin_layout Chapter
48170 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48172 \begin_inset Index idx
48175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48184 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48191 \begin_layout Standard
48193 \begin_inset space ~
48197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48199 reference "tab:Units"
48203 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48204 and used in this documentation.
48207 \begin_layout Standard
48208 \begin_inset Float table
48214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48215 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48233 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48241 \begin_inset Tabular
48242 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48243 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48245 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48452 scaled point (65536
48453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48531 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48604 % of original image width
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48920 \begin_layout Chapter
48922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48924 name "chap:Credits"
48931 \begin_layout Standard
48932 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48933 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48936 \begin_layout Itemize
48939 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48942 \begin_layout Itemize
48948 \begin_layout Itemize
48954 \begin_layout Itemize
48960 \begin_layout Itemize
48966 \begin_layout Itemize
48972 \begin_layout Itemize
48978 \begin_layout Itemize
48984 \begin_layout Itemize
48987 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48990 \begin_layout Itemize
48996 \begin_layout Itemize
49002 \begin_layout Itemize
49008 \begin_layout Itemize
49014 \begin_layout Itemize
49020 \begin_layout Itemize
49026 \begin_layout Itemize
49032 \begin_layout Itemize
49038 \begin_layout Itemize
49039 The \SpecialChar LyX
49041 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49051 \begin_layout Standard
49052 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49055 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49062 \begin_layout Bibliography
49063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49064 LatexCommand bibitem
49071 The \SpecialChar LyX
49073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49076 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49082 \begin_inset Newline newline
49086 \begin_inset Flex URL
49089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49091 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49099 \begin_layout Bibliography
49100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49101 LatexCommand bibitem
49102 key "latexcompanion"
49107 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49109 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49110 Companion Second Edition.
49113 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49116 \begin_layout Bibliography
49117 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49118 LatexCommand bibitem
49124 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49127 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49131 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49134 \begin_layout Bibliography
49135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49136 LatexCommand bibitem
49145 : A Document Preparation System.
49148 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49151 \begin_layout Bibliography
49152 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49153 LatexCommand bibitem
49163 The \SpecialChar TeX
49167 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49170 \begin_layout Bibliography
49171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49172 LatexCommand bibitem
49178 The \SpecialChar TeX
49180 \begin_inset Newline newline
49184 \begin_inset Flex URL
49187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49189 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49197 \begin_layout Bibliography
49198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49199 LatexCommand bibitem
49205 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49207 \begin_inset Newline newline
49211 \begin_inset Flex URL
49214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49216 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49224 \begin_layout Bibliography
49225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49226 LatexCommand bibitem
49233 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49235 name "Documentation"
49236 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49243 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49247 \begin_inset Newline newline
49251 \begin_inset Flex URL
49254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49256 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49264 \begin_layout Bibliography
49265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49266 LatexCommand bibitem
49273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49275 name "Documentation"
49276 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49281 how to use the program
49283 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49287 \begin_inset Newline newline
49291 \begin_inset Flex URL
49294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49296 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49304 \begin_layout Bibliography
49305 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49306 LatexCommand bibitem
49313 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49315 name "Documentation"
49316 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49321 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49327 \begin_inset Index idx
49330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49332 packages ! biblatex
49338 \begin_inset Newline newline
49342 \begin_inset Flex URL
49345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49355 \begin_layout Bibliography
49356 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49357 LatexCommand bibitem
49364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49366 name "Documentation"
49367 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49372 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49378 \begin_inset Index idx
49381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49389 \begin_inset Newline newline
49393 \begin_inset Flex URL
49396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49398 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49406 \begin_layout Bibliography
49407 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49408 LatexCommand bibitem
49415 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49417 name "Documentation"
49418 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49428 \begin_inset Newline newline
49432 \begin_inset Flex URL
49435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49437 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49445 \begin_layout Bibliography
49446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49447 LatexCommand bibitem
49448 key "makeindex-man"
49454 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49457 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49467 \begin_inset Newline newline
49471 \begin_inset Flex URL
49474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49476 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49484 \begin_layout Bibliography
49485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49486 LatexCommand bibitem
49493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49495 name "Documentation"
49496 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49506 \begin_inset Newline newline
49510 \begin_inset Flex URL
49513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49515 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49523 \begin_layout Bibliography
49524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49525 LatexCommand bibitem
49532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49534 name "Documentation"
49535 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49540 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49542 \begin_inset Newline newline
49546 \begin_inset Flex URL
49549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49551 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49559 \begin_layout Bibliography
49560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49561 LatexCommand bibitem
49568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49570 name "Documentation"
49571 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49576 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49582 \begin_inset Index idx
49585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49593 \begin_inset Newline newline
49597 \begin_inset Flex URL
49600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49602 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49610 \begin_layout Bibliography
49611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49612 LatexCommand bibitem
49619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49621 name "Documentation"
49622 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49627 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49633 \begin_inset Index idx
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49638 packages ! enumitem
49644 \begin_inset Newline newline
49648 \begin_inset Flex URL
49651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49653 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49661 \begin_layout Bibliography
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49663 LatexCommand bibitem
49670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49672 name "Documentation"
49673 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49678 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49684 \begin_inset Index idx
49687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49689 packages ! fancyhdr
49695 \begin_inset Newline newline
49699 \begin_inset Flex URL
49702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49704 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49712 \begin_layout Bibliography
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49714 LatexCommand bibitem
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49723 name "Documentation"
49724 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49729 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49735 \begin_inset Index idx
49738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49740 packages ! hyperref
49746 \begin_inset Newline newline
49750 \begin_inset Flex URL
49753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49755 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49763 \begin_layout Bibliography
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49765 LatexCommand bibitem
49772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49774 name "Documentation"
49775 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49780 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49786 \begin_inset Index idx
49789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49797 \begin_inset Newline newline
49801 \begin_inset Flex URL
49804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49806 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49814 \begin_layout Bibliography
49815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49816 LatexCommand bibitem
49823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49825 name "Documentation"
49826 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49831 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49837 \begin_inset Index idx
49840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49842 packages ! prettyref
49848 \begin_inset Newline newline
49852 \begin_inset Flex URL
49855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49857 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49865 \begin_layout Bibliography
49866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49867 LatexCommand bibitem
49874 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49876 name "Documentation"
49877 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49882 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49888 \begin_inset Index idx
49891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 packages ! refstyle
49899 \begin_inset Newline newline
49903 \begin_inset Flex URL
49906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49908 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49916 \begin_layout Bibliography
49917 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49918 LatexCommand bibitem
49925 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49928 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49933 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49935 \begin_inset Newline newline
49939 \begin_inset Flex URL
49942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49944 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49952 \begin_layout Bibliography
49953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49954 LatexCommand bibitem
49961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49964 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49969 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49971 \begin_inset Newline newline
49975 \begin_inset Flex URL
49978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49980 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49988 \begin_layout Bibliography
49989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49990 LatexCommand bibitem
49997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50000 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50005 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50006 for Cyrillic languages:
50007 \begin_inset Newline newline
50011 \begin_inset Flex URL
50014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50016 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50024 \begin_layout Bibliography
50025 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50026 LatexCommand bibitem
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50036 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50041 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50043 \begin_inset Newline newline
50047 \begin_inset Flex URL
50050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50052 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50060 \begin_layout Bibliography
50061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50062 LatexCommand bibitem
50069 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50072 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50077 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50079 \begin_inset Newline newline
50083 \begin_inset Flex URL
50086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50088 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50096 \begin_layout Bibliography
50097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50098 LatexCommand bibitem
50105 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50108 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50113 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50115 \begin_inset Newline newline
50119 \begin_inset Flex URL
50122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50124 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50132 \begin_layout Bibliography
50133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50134 LatexCommand bibitem
50141 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50144 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50149 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50151 \begin_inset Newline newline
50155 \begin_inset Flex URL
50158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50160 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50168 \begin_layout Bibliography
50169 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50170 LatexCommand bibitem
50177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50180 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50185 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50187 \begin_inset Newline newline
50191 \begin_inset Flex URL
50194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50196 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50204 \begin_layout Bibliography
50205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50206 LatexCommand bibitem
50213 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50216 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50221 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50223 \begin_inset Newline newline
50227 \begin_inset Flex URL
50230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50232 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50240 \begin_layout Bibliography
50241 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50242 LatexCommand bibitem
50249 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50252 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50257 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50259 \begin_inset Newline newline
50263 \begin_inset Flex URL
50266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50268 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50276 \begin_layout Bibliography
50277 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50278 LatexCommand bibitem
50285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50288 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50293 about new features in
50299 \begin_inset Newline newline
50303 \begin_inset Flex URL
50306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50308 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50316 \begin_layout Standard
50317 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50351 \begin_inset Note Note
50354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50361 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50362 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50363 bibliography is the second one:
50371 \begin_layout Standard
50372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50373 LatexCommand bibtex
50374 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50375 options "biblio/alphadin"
50382 \begin_layout Standard
50383 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50387 \begin_layout Standard
50388 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50389 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50395 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50396 LatexCommand printindex